Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 273

Loop-O9400R

SDH/SONET ADM
User’s Manual

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


6F, Number 8, Hsin Ann Rd., Hsinchu Science Park,
Hsinchu, 30078 Taiwan
Tel: +886-3-5787696
Fax: +886-3-5646272
 2017 Loop Telecommunication International, Inc. All rights reserved.
Version 34 November 2, 2017
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Disclaimers

I. Manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss resulting from the
use of this manual.

II. Manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any loss or claims by third parties that
may arise through the use of this product.

III. Manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss caused by incorrect
use of this product.

IV. The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice due to
engineering improvements.

V. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the express written
consent of the Manufacturer.

VI. Sample displays shown in this manual may differ from the actual displays.

VII. Information in this manual may differ from software information due to firmware
changes.

VIII. All brands and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective holders.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


i
User’s Manual
O9400-R

D Bitte führen Sie das Gerät am Ende seinerLewbensdauer den zue Verfügung
stehended Rückgabeund Sammelsystemen zu.

GB At the end of the product's useful life, please dispose of it at appropriate


collection points provided in your country

F Une fois le produit en fin devie, veuillez le déposer dans un point de recyclage
approprié.

ES Para preservar el medio ambiente, al final dela vida útil de su producto,


depositelo en los laguares destinado aello de acuerdo con la legislación vigente.

P No final de vida útil do producto, por favor coloque no ponto de recolha


apropriado.

I I Onde tutelare l'ambiente, non buttate l'apparecchio trai i normali rifiuti al


termine della sua vita utile, ma portatelo presso i punti di raccolta specifici per
questi rifiuti previsti dalla normativa vigente.

NL Wij raden u aan het apparant aan het einde van zijn nuttige levensduur, niet bij
hey gewone huisafval te deponeren, maar op de dearvoor bestemde adressen.

DK Når produktet er udtjent, bor det børtskaffes via de sæ rlige indsamlingssteder i


landet.

N Ved slutten av produktets levetid bør det avhendes på en kommunal miljøstasjon


eller leveres til en elektroforhandler.

S Lämna vänligen in produkten på lämplig återvinningsstation när den är


förbrukad.

FIN Hävitä tuote käytöiän päättyessä viemällä se asianmukaiseen keräyspisteeseen.

PL Gdy produkt nie nadaje sie juz do dalszego uzytku, nalezy zostawic go w jednym
ze specjalnych punktów zajmujacych sie zbiórka zuzytych producktów w
wybranych miejscach na terenie kraju.

CZ Po skončení jeho životnosti odložte prosím výrobek na přislušném sbĕrném


místé zřízeném dle předpisů ve vaší zemi.

SK Po skončení jeho životnosti odovzdajte prosím zariadenie na príslušnom


zbernom mieste podía platných miestnych predpisov a noriem.

SLO Ko se izdelku izteče življenska doba, ga odnesite na ustrezno zbirno mesto


oziroma ga odvrzite v skladu z veljavnimi predpisi.

GR Στο Тέλος тης λειτουργικής Ζωής του προϊόντος παρακαλώ


Πετξτε το στα ειōικά σημεία που Παρέχονται οτη χωρα σας.
PRC 當產品使用壽命結束,請在你的國家所提供的適當地點做好回收處理

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


2
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Table of Contents
1. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ..........................................................................................1
1.1. Description ...........................................................................................................1
1.2. Applications .........................................................................................................3
1.3. Specifications.......................................................................................................5
2. INSTALLATION ...........................................................................................................9
2.1. Site Preparation ...................................................................................................9
2.2. Mechanical Installation ........................................................................................9
2.2.1. Installation Overview ...................................................................................9
2.2.2. Power........................................................................................................10
2.2.3. Rack Mounting Instruction ........................................................................10
2.2.4. Chassis Grounding ...................................................................................11
2.2.5. Power Connection.....................................................................................11
2.2.6. Fiber Optic Line Connections ....................................................................13
2.2.7. Console Port .............................................................................................13
2.2.8. Interface Block Diagram............................................................................14
2.2.9. Configuration Type....................................................................................15
2.2.9.1. Two STM-4(OC-12) Main Rings Configuration ...............................15
2.2.9.2. Two STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) Linear Chains Configuration ....................15
2.2.9.3. One STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) Main Ring with MSP(1+1) ........................16
2.2.9.4. One Main STM1/4 (OC-3/12) Ring plus One Main STM-1/4 (OC-
3/12) Linear Chain Config. ..............................................................................16
2.2.9.5. Five Rings .......................................................................................17
2.3. Card Types and Capacities................................................................................18
3. INTERFACES .............................................................................................................19
3.1. Power ................................................................................................................19
3.1.1. Power module, -48Vdc..............................................................................20
3.2. Connector Card .................................................................................................20
3.2.1. VT-100 Terminal Interface ........................................................................21
3.2.2. Alarm Interface .........................................................................................21
3.2.3. Alarm Input Jumper Setup ........................................................................21
3.2.3.1. Connectors of Alarm Interface ........................................................23
3.2.4. External Timing Connector .......................................................................24
3.3. Fiber Optic Connections ....................................................................................24
3.4. Controller Card (XCU Card) ...............................................................................26
3.4.1. Description ................................................................................................26
3.4.2. Controller Card LEDs ................................................................................27
3.4.3. Ethernet Interface .....................................................................................27
3.4.4. Optical Connections ..................................................................................27
3.5. Fan Tray ............................................................................................................28
3.6. Fanless Chassis ................................................................................................28
3.7. E1/T1 .................................................................................................................30
3.7.1. Brief Description .......................................................................................30
3.8. E3/T3 .................................................................................................................32
3.8.1. Brief Description .......................................................................................32
3.9. STM-1/4 and OC-3/12 Interface Card ................................................................33
3.9.1. Brief Description .......................................................................................33
3.10. Cards Installation ............................................................................................34
3.10.1. Controller Card Installation .....................................................................34
Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.
iii
User’s Manual
O9400-R

3.10.2. Plug-in Card Installation ..........................................................................34


3.10.3. Cards Replacement ................................................................................35
3.10.3.1. Remove the Old Cards .................................................................35
3.10.3.2. Install the New Controller Card .....................................................35
3.10.3.3. Install the New Plug-in Card .........................................................36
3.10.4. Cards Removal .......................................................................................36
4. CLOCK TIMING .........................................................................................................37
4.1. Clock Synchronization Overview .......................................................................37
4.1.1. Primary Timing Path .................................................................................37
4.1.2. Timing Path Protection..............................................................................37
4.1.3. Timing Choices for Transport Systems .....................................................38
4.2. Clock Timing on the O9400R .............................................................................38
4.2.1. Clock Priority .............................................................................................39
5. SYSTEM OPERATIONS OVERVIEW ........................................................................41
5.1. Logon and Password Setup ...............................................................................46
5.1.1. Display ......................................................................................................46
5.1.2. Setup ........................................................................................................46
5.1.3. Log ............................................................................................................46
5.1.4. MISC .........................................................................................................46
5.2. System Configuration Setup ..............................................................................46
5.2.1. System Setup ...........................................................................................46
5.2.2. SNMP System Config Setup .....................................................................47
5.2.3. Timing Source Setup ................................................................................47
5.2.4. Customer Information Setup .....................................................................47
5.2.5. SNTP Setup ..............................................................................................47
5.2.6. DHCP Relay Setup ...................................................................................47
5.2.7. Bridge and Router Setup ..........................................................................47
5.2.8. Hand-waving LED Setup...........................................................................47
5.2.9. SSH Setup ................................................................................................47
5.2.10. M13 Setup ..............................................................................................48
5.2.11. RADIUS Setup ........................................................................................48
5.3. SDH/SONET Configuration Setup .....................................................................49
5.3.1. System Mode Setup..................................................................................49
5.4. Overhead Setup.................................................................................................49
5.5. Cross Connect Create .......................................................................................50
5.6. Cross Connect Delete ........................................................................................50
5.7. ALS/APSD Setup ...............................................................................................50
5.8. DCC Channel Setup ..........................................................................................50
5.9. Path Granularity Setup ......................................................................................50
5.10. MSP APS Command ......................................................................................50
5.11. Map Change ...................................................................................................51
5.12. Map Delete .....................................................................................................51
5.13. Map Copy .......................................................................................................51
5.14. SNCP/UPSR APS Command .........................................................................51
5.15. Idle Path Alarm Insertion Setup ......................................................................51
5.16. Path-protected TSA (Time Slot Assignment) Setup ........................................51
5.17. Clear Controller Card Port Cross Connect ......................................................52
5.18. Alarm Setup ....................................................................................................52
5.18.1. Alarm Type Overview..............................................................................52
5.18.2. System Alarm I Setup .............................................................................53
Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.
iv
User’s Manual
O9400-R

5.18.3. System Alarm II Setup ............................................................................54


5.18.4. Line Alarm Mask/Relay Setup .................................................................54
5.18.5. HO-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup .........................................54
5.18.6. LO-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup ............................................54
5.18.7. SDH/SONET Alarm Severity Setup ........................................................54
5.18.8. External (Environment) Alarm Setup.......................................................54
5.18.9. SD/SF Threshold Setup ..........................................................................55
5.18.10. Insert AIS Alarm Setup .........................................................................55
5.18.11. Alarm Output Setup ..............................................................................55
5.18.12. Inhibit Port Alarm Setup ........................................................................55
5.19. File Transfer....................................................................................................55
5.19.1. Download Mainboard Firmware ..............................................................55
5.19.2. Download Current Configuration .............................................................55
5.19.3. Download Backup Configuration .............................................................55
5.19.4. Upload Current Configuration from FLASH.............................................56
5.19.5. Upload Backup Configuration from FLASH.............................................56
5.19.6. Change Firmware Boot Bank ..................................................................56
5.19.7. Copy Firmware to other Controller Card .................................................56
5.20. Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration ..............................................................57
5.21. Loopback/Diagnostic Setup ............................................................................57
5.21.1. Local Loopback .......................................................................................57
5.21.2. Line Loopback ........................................................................................57
5.21.3. Payload Loopback ..................................................................................57
5.22. Performance Setup .........................................................................................59
5.23. Tributary Card Registration .............................................................................59
6. SYSTEM SETUP ........................................................................................................60
6.1. Logon and Password Setup ...............................................................................60
6.1.1. Logon ........................................................................................................60
6.1.2. Change a Password..................................................................................62
6.2. System Setup ....................................................................................................65
6.2.1. Setup Screen Access................................................................................65
6.2.2. System Setup Procedure ..........................................................................66
6.3. SNMP Setup .....................................................................................................68
6.3.1. Setup Screen Access................................................................................68
6.3.2. SNMP System Setup ................................................................................69
6.3.2.1. SNMP System Setup .....................................................................69
6.3.2.2. V1 Community & Trap Setup ..........................................................70
6.3.2.3. V3 User-Base Security Model Setup ..............................................71
6.3.2.4. V3 View-Base Access Control Model Setup1 .................................73
6.3.2.5. V3 View-Base Access Control Model Setup2 .................................73
6.3.2.6. V3 Target & Notify Setup ................................................................74
6.3.2.7. Load default SNMPV3 settings .......................................................75
6.4. Timing Source Setup .........................................................................................75
6.4.1. Setup Screen Access................................................................................75
6.4.2. Timing Source Setup Procedure ...............................................................76
6.4.3. SSM Conversion Table Setup Procedure .................................................87
6.5. Customer Information Setup ..............................................................................88
6.5.1. Setup Screen Access................................................................................88
6.5.2. Customer Information Setup Procedure....................................................90
6.6. SNTP Setup .......................................................................................................91
Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.
v
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.6.1. Setup Screen Access................................................................................91


6.6.2. SNTP Setup Procedure ............................................................................92
6.7. DHCP Relay Setup ............................................................................................93
6.7.1. Setup Screen Access................................................................................93
6.7.2. DHCP Relay Setup Procedure ..................................................................94
6.8. Bridge and Router Setup ...................................................................................95
6.8.1. Setup Screen Access................................................................................95
6.8.2. Bridge and Router Setup Procedure .........................................................96
6.8.2.1. Network Interface Setup I ...............................................................96
6.8.2.2. Network Interface Setup II ..............................................................97
6.8.2.3. Static Route Setup ..........................................................................98
6.8.2.4. Bridge Spanning Tree Setup I ........................................................98
6.8.2.5. Bridge Spanning Tree Setup II .....................................................100
6.9. Hand-waving LED Setup..................................................................................101
6.9.1. Setup Screen Access..............................................................................101
6.9.2. Hand-waving LED Setup Procedure .......................................................102
6.10. SSH Setup ....................................................................................................103
6.10.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................103
6.10.2. SSH Setup Procedure...........................................................................104
6.11. M13 Setup ....................................................................................................105
6.11.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................105
6.12. RADIUS Setup ..............................................................................................106
6.12.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................107
6.13. System Mode Setup .....................................................................................109
6.13.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................109
6.13.2. System Mode Setup..............................................................................110
6.14. Overhead Setup ............................................................................................112
6.14.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................112
6.14.2. Overhead Setup Procedure ..................................................................113
6.14.2.1. Line Overhead Setup ..................................................................113
6.14.2.2. HO-Path/STS-Path Overhead Setup ..........................................115
6.15. Cross Connect Create ..................................................................................117
6.15.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................117
6.15.2. Cross Connect Create ..........................................................................118
6.16. Cross Connect Delete ...................................................................................124
6.16.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................124
6.16.1.1. Cross Connect Delete Setup Procedure .....................................125
6.17. ALS/APSD Setup ..........................................................................................127
6.17.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................127
6.17.2. ALS/APSD Setup Setup Procedure ......................................................128
6.18. DCC Channel Setup .....................................................................................130
6.18.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................130
6.18.2. DCC Channel Setup Procedure ............................................................131
6.19. Path Granularity Setup..................................................................................133
6.19.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................133
6.19.2. Path Granularity Setup Procedure ........................................................134
6.20. MSP APS Command ....................................................................................136
6.20.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................136
6.20.2. MSP APS Command Setup Procedure.................................................137
6.21. Map Change .................................................................................................138
Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.
vi
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.21.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................138


6.21.2. Map Change Setup Procedure .............................................................139
6.22. Map Delete ...................................................................................................140
6.22.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................140
6.22.2. Map Delete Setup Procedure ................................................................141
6.23. Map Copy .....................................................................................................141
6.23.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................141
6.23.2. Map Copy Setup Procedure ..................................................................143
6.24. SNCP/UPSR APS Command .......................................................................144
6.24.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................144
6.24.2. SNCP/UPSR APS Command Procedure ..............................................145
6.24.3. SNCP/UPSR Revertive Setup ..............................................................146
6.24.4. SNCP/UPSR AIS Insert Setup ..............................................................147
6.24.5. SNCP/UPSR WTR Setup .....................................................................149
6.24.6. SNCP/UPSR UNEQP Setup .................................................................150
6.25. Idle Path Alarm Insertion Setup ....................................................................151
6.25.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................152
6.25.2. Idle Path Alarm Insertion Setup Procedure ...........................................153
6.26. Path-protected TSA (Time Slot Assignment) Setup ......................................154
6.26.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................154
6.27. Clear XCU Port Cross Connect ....................................................................157
6.27.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................157
6.28. Alarm Setup ..................................................................................................159
6.28.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................159
6.28.2. System Alarm Setup I ...........................................................................160
6.28.3. System Alarm Setup II ..........................................................................162
6.28.4. Line Alarm Mask/Relay Setup ...............................................................163
6.28.5. HO-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup .......................................164
6.28.6. LO-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup ..........................................165
6.28.7. SDH/SONET Alarm Severity Setup ......................................................167
6.28.8. External Alarm Setup ............................................................................168
6.28.9. SD/SF Threshold Setup ........................................................................169
6.28.10. Insert AIS Alarm Setup .......................................................................170
6.28.11. AIarm Output Setup ............................................................................171
6.28.12. Inhibit Port Alarm Setup ......................................................................172
6.29. File Transfer..................................................................................................173
6.30. Download Mainboard Firmware ....................................................................175
6.30.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................175
6.30.2. Download Mainboard Firmware Procedure...........................................176
6.31. Download Current Configuration ...................................................................177
6.31.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................177
6.31.2. Download Current Configuration Procedure .........................................178
6.32. Download Backup Configuration ...................................................................179
6.32.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................179
6.32.2. Download Backup Configuration Procedure .........................................180
6.33. Upload Current Configuration from FLASH...................................................181
6.33.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................181
6.33.2. Upload Current Configuration Procedure ..............................................182
6.34. Upload Backup Configuration from FLASH...................................................183
6.34.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................183
Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.
vii
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.34.2. Upload Backup Configuration from FLASH Procedure .........................184


6.35. Change Firmware Boot Bank ........................................................................185
6.35.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................185
6.35.2. Change Firmware Boot Bank Procedure ..............................................186
6.36. Copy Firmware to Other Controller Card ......................................................187
6.36.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................187
6.36.2. Copy Firmware to Other XCU Procedure..............................................188
6.37. Controller Card Firmware Synchronization ...................................................189
6.38. Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration ............................................................190
6.38.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................190
6.38.2. Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration Procedure ..................................190
6.38.2.1. Store Backup Configuration ........................................................191
6.38.2.2. Retrieve Backup Configuration ...................................................191
6.39. Loopback/Diagnostics Setup ........................................................................192
6.39.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................192
6.39.2. Loopback/Diagnostics Setup Procedure ...............................................192
6.39.2.1. XCU Port Loopback Test Setup Procedure ................................193
6.39.2.2. Controller Card Diagnostics Setup Procedure ............................193
6.40. Performance Setup/Clear .............................................................................195
6.40.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................195
6.40.1.1. Clear Performancer Data Procedure ..........................................196
6.40.1.2. Performance Threshold Setup Procedure ..................................196
6.41. Unit Registration ...........................................................................................197
6.41.1. Setup Screen Access............................................................................197
6.41.2. Unit Registration Procedure ..................................................................197
7. SDH/SONET FEATURES ........................................................................................201
7.1. Introduction ......................................................................................................201
7.2. Multiplexing structure and Mapping modes......................................................203
7.2.1. Mapping of Tributaries into VC-n ............................................................203
7.2.1.1. Asynchronous of 44 736 kbps ......................................................203
7.2.1.2. Asynchronous mapping of 34 368 kbps ........................................204
7.2.1.3. Asynchronous mapping of 2048kbps ............................................205
7.2.1.4. Mapping of GFP Frames ..............................................................206
7.2.1.5. Loop Proprietary Mapping of RS232.............................................207
7.2.1.6. TM-N Physical layer......................................................................207
7.2.1.7. STM-N Regenerator and Multiplex Section layer ..........................208
7.2.1.8. VC-n/m Path layer ........................................................................208
7.2.1.9. VC-4/VC-3 POH Implementation ..................................................209
7.2.1.10. VC-2/VC-1 POH Implementation ................................................210
7.2.2. Cross-connect .........................................................................................210
7.2.3. Concatenation schemes .........................................................................211
7.2.3.1. Virtual concatenation ....................................................................211
7.2.4. Protection................................................................................................211
7.2.4.1. MSP 1+1 linear .............................................................................211
7.2.4.2. SNC Protection .............................................................................212
7.2.5. Performance Monitoring..........................................................................213
7.2.5.1. Regenerator and multiplex section performance monitoring .........213
7.2.5.2. Path performance monitoring .......................................................214
7.2.5.3. Synchronization ............................................................................215
7.3. PDH Features ..................................................................................................215
Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.
viii
User’s Manual
O9400-R

7.3.1. E1 features .............................................................................................215


7.3.2. E3/T3 Features .......................................................................................216
7.3.2.1. General information ......................................................................216
7.3.3. Loopback ................................................................................................217
7.4. Management Features .....................................................................................218
7.4.1. Introduction .............................................................................................218
7.4.2. Management Interfaces ..........................................................................218
7.4.2.1. Management port..........................................................................218
7.4.2.2. DCC channels...............................................................................218
7.4.2.3. Device ...........................................................................................219
7.4.2.4. SDH/SONET Alarm ......................................................................220
7.4.2.5. Unit Card ......................................................................................221
7.5. Configuration Management..............................................................................225
7.5.1. Backup and Restoration of Configuration Data .......................................225
7.5.2. Software download .................................................................................225
7.5.3. Feature management..............................................................................225
7.5.4. Device reset ............................................................................................225
7.5.5. Module Management ..............................................................................225
8. O9400R TOPOLOGY PROTECTION TYPES ..........................................................226
8.1. Configuration 1: Linear Topology without Protection .......................................227
8.2. Configuration 2: Linear Topology with MSP (1+1) Protection ..........................228
8.3. Configuration 3: Ring Topology with SNCP/UPSR Protection .........................230
8.4. Configuration 4: Ring Topology without SNCP/UPSR Protection ....................232
8.5. Configuration 5: Ring Topology with and without SNCP/UPSR Protection ......234
8.6. Configuration 6: Ring Topology with both SNCP/UPSR & MSP Protection ....235
8.7. Configuration 7: Ring Topology with MSP Protection .....................................237
9. ALARM TRAP APPENDIX .......................................................................................239
9.1. Local Alarm Trap .............................................................................................239
9.2. Critical Alarm Active Trap ................................................................................240
9.3. Critical Alarm Cleared Trap..............................................................................241
9.4. Major Alarm Active Trap ..................................................................................242
9.5. Major Alarm Cleared Trap................................................................................243
9.6. Minor Alarm ActiveTrap ...................................................................................244
9.7. Minor Alarm Cleared Trap................................................................................245
9.8. Info ActiveTrap.................................................................................................246
9.9. Info Cleared Trap .............................................................................................247
9.9.1. alarmQueueUnit ......................................................................................247
9.9.2. alarmQueueCard Model: Card Model Type ............................................248
9.9.3. alarmQueueRegModel: Reg. model type ................................................248
9.9.4. alarmQueuePortNum: Port index ............................................................248
9.9.5. alarmQueueVcChan: VC channel ...........................................................249
9.9.6. alarmQueueAlmNum 0 to 30: System alarm ...........................................249
9.9.7. alarmQueueAlmNum 36 to 126: SHD alarm ...........................................250
9.9.8. alarmQueueAlmNum 136 to 226: SONET alarm ....................................251
9.9.9. alarmQueueAlmNum 300 to 303: E1T1 alarm ........................................252
9.9.10. alarmQueueAlmNum 500 to 600: E3T3 alarm ......................................252
9.9.11. alarmQueueVC43STS31Type: AU4 /AU3 type in SDH, STS-3c or STS-1
type in SONET .....................................................................................................252
9.9.12. alarmQueueTU1xVTxType: Tu1x type..................................................253
9.9.13. alarmQueueVC4STS3: The number of STM1 ......................................253
Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.
ix
User’s Manual
O9400-R

9.9.14. alarmQueueVC3TUG3: The number of Tug3 .......................................253


9.9.15. alarmQueueTUG2VTG: The number of Tug2 .......................................254
9.9.16. alarmQueueTU1xVTx: The number of Tu1x .........................................254
9.9.17. alarmQueueStatus: Alarm status ..........................................................254
9.9.18. alarmQueueSeverity: Alarm severity.....................................................254
10. ACTIVATE INET-LCT ..............................................................................................255
10.1. Activate iNET-LCT ........................................................................................255
11. GLOSSARY..............................................................................................................258

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


x
User’s Manual
O9400-R

List of Figures
Figure 1-1 O9400R ..................................................................................................... 1
Figure 1-2 O9400R Application Diagram ................................................................... 3
Figure 1-3 Two Ring Protections ............................................................................... 4
Figure 2-1 Rack Mount Ears (Brackets)................................................................... 10
Figure 2-2 Mounting the O9400R in a Rack ............................................................ 10
Figure 2-3 Ground Screw Location .......................................................................... 11
Figure 2-4 DC Power With/Without Grounding Application...................................... 12
Figure 2-5 AC/DC Power With/Without Grounding Application ................................ 12
Figure 2-6 DB9 Console Port ................................................................................... 13
Figure 2-7 Interface Block Diagram ......................................................................... 14
Figure 2-8 Two STM-4 (OC-12) Main Rings Configuration ...................................... 15
Figure 2-9 Two STM-1/4 (OC3/12) Linear Chains ................................................... 15
Figure 2-10 One STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) Main Ring with MSP(1+1) ............................. 16
Figure 2-11 One Main STM1/4 (OC-3/12) Ring plus One Main STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) Linear
Chain Config. ..................................................................................................... 16
Figure 2-12 Five Rings ............................................................................................ 17
Figure 3-1 Power Modules (-48Vdc and AC/DC) .................................................... 19
Figure 3-2 Connector Card ...................................................................................... 20
Figure 3-3 SFP module........................................................................................... 24
Figure 3-4 Controller Card ....................................................................................... 26
Figure 3-5 Fan Tray ................................................................................................. 28
Figure 3-6 E1 (75 ohm) 16, 32 and 63 Port Interface Cards .................................... 30
Figure 3-7 E1 (120 ohm)/T1 16, 32 and 63 Port Interface Cards ............................. 31
Figure 3-8 E3/T3 Interface Card .............................................................................. 32
Figure 3-9 B155 /622 Interface Card ....................................................................... 33
Figure 4-1 Primary Timing Path in a Digital Network ............................................... 37
Figure 4-2 Timing Path Protection in a Digital Network (1) ...................................... 38
Figure 4-3 O9400R Clock Timing ............................................................................ 39
Figure 5-1 VT-100 Menu Tree Overview ................................................................. 42
Figure 5-2 VT-100 Menu Tree – LOG and MISC. Sections ..................................... 43
Figure 5-3 VT-100 Menu Tree – DISPLAY Section ................................................. 44
Figure 5-4 VT-100 Menu Tree – SETUP Section .................................................... 45
Figure 5-5 Loopback Block Diagram ....................................................................... 58
Figure 6-1 Aggregate Line Protection Grouping .................................................... 111
Figure 6-2 Cross Connect Diagram ....................................................................... 122
Figure 6-3 SNCP/UPSR Ring (normal) .................................................................. 148
Figure 6-4 SNCP/UPSR Ring (line break), without AIS Insertion Enabled ............ 148
Figure 6-5 SNCP/UPSR Ring (line break), with AIS Insertion Enabled ................. 149
Figure 7-1 SONET Layer Terminology .................................................................. 201
Figure 7-2 SDH Layer Terminology ....................................................................... 202
Figure 7-3 Multiplexing/Mapping Structure adapted from ITU-T G.707/Y.1322 ..... 203
Figure 7-4 Asynchronous Mapping of 44 736 kbps Tributary into VC-3 ................ 204
Figure 7-5 Asynchronous Mapping of 34 368 kbps Tributary into VC-3 ................ 204
Figure 7-6 Asynchronous Mapping of 2048kbps into VC-12.................................. 205
Figure 7-7 Mapping of GFP Frames into C-n......................................................... 206
Figure 7-8 Loop Proprietary Mapping of RS232 .................................................... 207
Figure 7-9 STM-n Section Overhead (SOH) .......................................................... 208
Figure 7-10 VC-4 POH .......................................................................................... 209
Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.
xi
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Figure 7-11 OC-12 Concatenation .......................................................................... 209


Figure 7-12 VC-12 POH ........................................................................................ 210
Figure 7-13 Protection schemes for Loop-O9400R ............................................... 211
Figure 7-14 O9400R Loopback Diagram ............................................................... 217
Figure 8-1 Linear Topology without Protection ...................................................... 227
Figure 8-2 Linear Topology with MSP (1+1) Protection ......................................... 228
Figure 8-3-a Ring Topology with SNCP/UPSR Protection (Normal) ...................... 230
Figure 8-4-b Ring Topology with SNCP/UPSR Protection (Failed Condition)........ 231
Figure 8-5 Ring Topology without SNCP/UPSR Protection ................................... 232
Figure 8-6 Ring Topology with both SNCP/UPSR & MSP Protection .................... 235
Figure 8-7 Maximum Tolerance of Fiber-Cut in Ring Topology with both SNCP/UPSR &
MSP Protection................................................................................................ 236
Figure 8-8 Ring Topology with MSP Protection ..................................................... 237
Figure 8-9 Maximum Tolerance of Fiber-Cut in Ring Topology with MSP Protection238

List of Tables
Table 2-1 STM-1/4 (OC3/12) aggregate line ............................................................ 18
Table 3-1 Pin-out for -48 DC Connector .................................................................. 20
Table 3-2 DB9 Console Port Pinout Table ............................................................... 21
Table 3-3 Pin-out for Alarm Input Connector ........................................................... 23
Table 3-4 Alarm Output Table .................................................................................. 23
Table 3-5 RJ-45 Pinout for Clock Input/Output ........................................................ 24
Table 3-6 LED Indicators for Controller Card........................................................... 27
Table 3-7 RJ-45 Pinout for Ethernet Port................................................................. 27
Table 3-8 Fan Control Temperatures....................................................................... 28
Table 3-9 Description for Controller Card Protection Status .................................... 36
Table 5-1 Alarm Setup Table ................................................................................... 52
Table 5-2 System Alarm Setup I Descriptions ......................................................... 53
Table 5-3 System Alarm Setup II Descriptions ........................................................ 54
Table 5-4 External Alarm Descriptions .................................................................... 54
Table 5-5 Performance Monitoring Parameters ....................................................... 59
Table 6-1 Description for Controller Card protection status ..................................... 62
Table 6-2 SystemSetup Setting Options .................................................................. 66
Table 6-3 SNMP System Setting Options ................................................................ 69
Table 6-4 V1 Community & Trap Setting Options .................................................... 70
Table 6-5 Network Interface Setup I Settings .................................................... 96
Table 6-6 Network Interface Setup II Settings ......................................................... 97
Table 6-7 Bridge Spanning Tree Setup I Settings ................................................... 99
Table 6-8 Bridge Spanning Tree Setup II Settings ................................................ 100
Table 6-9 Hand-waving LED Settings .................................................................... 102
Table 6-10 RADIUS Settings ................................................................................. 108
Table 6-11 System Mode Settings ......................................................................... 110
Table 6-12 Line Overhead Settings ....................................................................... 113
Table 6-13 JO_LEN Settings ................................................................................. 114
Table 6-14 HO-Path/STS-Path Overhead Settings ............................................... 115
Table 6-15 J1_LEN/HP_EPSL Settings ................................................................. 115
Table 6-16 Granularity Settings ............................................................................. 119
Table 6-17 Cross Connect Create Parameter Setting Options .............................. 119
Table 6-18 Cross Connect Type Settings .............................................................. 122
Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.
xii
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Table 6-19 Cross Connect Delete Settings............................................................. 125


Table 6-20 ALS/APSD Settings ............................................................................. 128
Table 6-21 DCC Channel Settings ........................................................................ 131
Table 6-22 Path Granularity Settings ..................................................................... 134
Table 6-23 MSP APS Command Setting Options .................................................. 137
Table 6-24 SDH/SONET SNCP/UPSR APS Command ........................................ 145
Table 6-25 Idle Path Alarm Insertion Setup ........................................................... 153
Table 6-26 System Alarm Setup I Settings ............................................................ 161
Table 6-27 System Alarm Setup II Settings .......................................................... 162
Table 6-28 Line Alarm Mask/Relay Settings .......................................................... 163
Table 6-29 HO-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Settings .................................. 164
Table 6-30 LO-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Settings ..................................... 165
Table 6-31 External Alarm Settings ....................................................................... 168
Table 6-32 SD/SF Threshold Settings ................................................................... 169
Table 6-33 Threshold Setting to Bit Error Rate Conversion ................................... 169
Table 6-34 Controller Card Port Loopback Test Setting ........................................ 193
Table 6-35 Controller Card Diagnostics Settings ................................................... 193
Table 6-36 Performance Threshold Settings ......................................................... 196
Table 6-37 Card Model Type ................................................................................. 200
Table 7-1 O9400R Device Alarms I ....................................................................... 219
Table 7-2 O9400R Device Alarms II ...................................................................... 219
Table 7-3 SDH/SONET Alarms ............................................................................. 220
Table 7-4 Miscellaneous Alarms ............................................................................ 221
Table 7-5 Alarm Parameters.................................................................................. 222
Table 7-6 Alarm Suppression Table for SDH Related Items.................................. 223
Table 7-7 Alarm Suppression Table for PDH (tributary) Alarms ............................ 223
Table 7-8 Alarm Suppression Sequence ............................................................... 224
Table 9-1alarmQueueUnit: Unit index..................................................................... 247
Table 9-2 Alarm Queue Card Model: Card model type .......................................... 248
Table 9-3 alarmQueueRegModel: Reg. model type .............................................. 248
Table 9-4 alarmQueuePortNum: Port index........................................................... 248
Table 9-5 alarmQueueVcChan: VC channel.......................................................... 249
Table 9-6 alarmQueueAlmNum 0 to 30: System alarm ......................................... 249
Table 9-7 alarmQueueAlmNum 36 to 126: SDH alarm .......................................... 250
Table 9-8 alarmQueueAlmNum 136 to 226: SONET alarm ................................... 251
Table 9-9 alarmQueueAlmNum 300 to 303: E1T1 alarm ....................................... 252
Table 9-10 alarmQueueAlmNum 500 to 600: E3T3 alarm ..................................... 252
Table 9-11 alarmQueueVC43STS31Type: AU4 /AU3 type in SDH, STS-3c or STS-1 type in
SONET ............................................................................................................ 252
Table 9-12 alarmQueueTU1xVTxType: Tu1x type ................................................ 253
Table 9-13 alarmQueueVC4STS3: The number of STM1 ..................................... 253
Table 9-14 alarmQueueVC3TUG3: The number of Tug3 ...................................... 253
Table 9-15 alarmQueueTUG2VTG: The number of Tug2...................................... 254
Table 9-16 alarmQueueTU1xVTx: The number of Tu1x ........................................ 254
Table 9-17 alarmQueueStatus: Alarm status ......................................................... 254
Table 9-18 alarmQueueSeverity: Alarm severity ................................................... 254

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


xiii
User’s Manual
O9400-R

1. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

1.1. Description
The Loop-O9400R STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) is an economical, STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) ADM Rack
designed to have full add and drop capability up to:
- 1 x STM-4 Tributaries
- 8 x STM-1 Tributaries
- 18 x E3/T3 Tributaries*
- 378 x E1/T1 Tributaries
- 48 x 10/100M Ethernet EoS Tributaries *
- 6 x GBE EoS Tributaries *

Fan
Tray

Power Modules XCU1(W) XCU2 (E)


Connector
Figure 1-1 O9400R
With up to 4 aggregate STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) interfaces, the O9400R can offer the service
provider a versatile protection scheme including SNCP/UPSR, and MSP (1+1) protection for
both ring and linear Network topology.

All interfaces are fully compliant with the relevant ETSI standards and ITU recommendations.
The O9400R provides powerful Operation, Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning
Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.
1
User’s Manual
O9400-R

(OAM&P) functionality, including fault management, performance monitoring, configuration


management, and network security management. Through console port, LAN port, In-band E1,
and DCC channel, the OAM&P can be achieved both locally and remotely via SNMP or menu-
driven interfaces.

The Loop-O9400R provides a complete set of operation interfaces that are consistent with the
Telecommunication Management Network (TMN) concept (ITU Recommendation M.30, G.784)
for SDH/SONET Network Element/Operations System (NE/OS), NE/NE, and NE/Craft
communications. Users can easily operate the O9400R both locally or remotely for centralized
management.

Ethernet Order Wire (EOW) is provided using VoIP technology

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


2
User’s Manual
O9400-R

1.2. Applications

Figure 1-2 O9400R Application Diagram

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


3
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Two Ring Protections

O9400R
Two STM-1/4 Trib #8
4

(OC-3/12) Rings 4

TPSG4
XCU2
(EAST) 4
4
Trib #7

O/E VC12
P2 XC fabric Trib #6 252*E1/T1
4
4

or
O/E
TPSG3 12*E3/DS3
P1
or
Trib #5
STM-1/4 (OC-3/12)
4
4
32* FE
Rings with or
Trib #4
SNCP/UPSR 622M 622M 4
6*STM-1
4

Protection MSP (1+1)


TPSG2
or
XCU1 4
4
Trib #3 1*STM-4
(WEST) MSP (1+1)
Trib #2
4
O/E 4

VC12
P2
XC fabric TPSG1
4
O/E 4

P1 Trib #1

Figure 1-3 Two Ring Protections

Five Rings

O9400R
2*STM-1/4 (OC-3/12)
O/ STM-1 (OC-3)
Rings 4
Trib #8 E STM1 P2
Sub-ring1
4 O/
XCU 2 TP E STM1 P1

(EAST) SG
#4
Trib #7 O/
STM-1 (OC-3)
STM1 P2

4
E
Sub-ring2
4 O/
STM1 P1
E

O/
E VC 12
P2 XC Fabric Trib
STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) 4 #6
O/
E STM1 P2 STM-1 (OC-3)
4

SNCP/UPSR Ring Sub-ring3


O/ O/
TP STM1 P1
E E
P1 SG
#3
Trib #5 O/
STM1 P2
E

4 O/
3*STM-1
STM1 P1
4
E (OC-3)
Rings
Trib O/
STM1 P2
622M 622M #4 E
4
4
O/
TP E STM1 P1
XC SG
1 Tri
U #2
(WEST) b O/
E STM1 P2
4 #3
4
O/
E STM1 P1

O/
Trib #2 E STM1 P2
O/ 4
4

STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) P2
E
VC12
XC Fabric
TP
O/
E
STM1 P1
SG
SNCP/UPSR Ring #1
O/ O/
E 4
Trib #1 E STM1 P2
P1 4

O/
STM1 P1
E

Figure
1-4 Five Rings

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


4
User’s Manual
O9400-R

1.3. Specifications
Max. Number of Cross-connect Modules
4 STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) aggregate lines

Max. Number of Tributary Modules


1 STM-4 (OC-12) tributaries
8 STM-1 (OC3) tributaries
18 E3/T3 tributaries
378 E1/T1 tributaries
6 GBE EoS tributaries
48 10/100M Ethernet EoS tributaries

SFP Module Characteristics


SFP Optical Module Direction Wavelength (nm) Connector Distance
(155 M bps)
MHBTW Dual uni-directional fiber 1310nm LC 2 Km
PHB3W Dual uni-directional fiber 1310nm LC 30 Km
PHB5W Dual uni-directional fiber 1310nm LC 50 Km
PHCUW Dual uni-directional fiber 1550nm LC 100 Km
PHCXW Dual uni-directional fiber 1550nm LC 120 Km
PHB3D Dual uni-directional fiber 1310nm LC ( with DDM) 30 Km
PHB5D Dual uni-directional fiber 1310nm LC ( with DDM) 50 Km
PHCUD Dual uni-directional fiber 1550nm LC ( with DDM) 100 Km
PHCXD Dual uni-directional fiber 1550nm LC ( with DDM) 120 Km
SFP Electrical Module Direction Wavelength (nm) Connector Distance
(155 M bps)
EHNAC Dual uni-directional n.a. Mini-BNC 100 m

SFP Optical Module Direction Wavelength (nm) Connector Distance


(622 M bps)
PJB2W Dual uni-directional fiber 1310nm LC 15-20 Km
PJB4W Dual uni-directional fiber 1310nm LC 40 Km
PJB5W Dual uni-directional fiber 1310nm LC 50 Km
PJC8W Dual uni-directional fiber 1550nm LC 80 Km
PIB1D Dual uni-directional fiber 1310nm LC ( with DDM) 15 Km
PJB2D Dual uni-directional fiber 1310nm LC ( with DDM) 15-20 Km
PJB4D Dual uni-directional fiber 1310nm LC ( with DDM) 40 Km
PJB5D Dual uni-directional fiber 1310nm LC ( with DDM) 50 Km
PJC8D Dual uni-directional fiber 1310nm LC ( with DDM) 80 Km

E1 Interface
Line Rate 2.048 Mbps ± 50 ppm Jitter ITU G.823
Line Code AMI/HDB3 Framing Unframed with a framing monitor on
receiving side
Input Signal ITU G.703 Impedance 75 ohm coax/120Ω twisted pair
Output Signal ITU G.703 Connector SCSI-II 68-pin
One connector for 16 ports
Two connectors for 32 ports
Four connectors for 63 ports
Output Mask ETS 300 689 Sec.4.2.1.2 ITU G.703

T1 Interface
Line Rate 1.544 Mbps ± 32 ppm Jitter ITU G.824
Line Code AMI/B8ZS Framing Unframed with a framing monitor on
receiving side
Input Signal ITU G.703 DSX-1 0dB to –6dB Impedance 100 ohm twisted pair

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


5
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Output Signal ITU G.703 DSX-1 w/short (0-110, Connector SCSI-II 68-pin
110-220, 220-330, 330-440, 440- One connector for 16 ports
550, 550-660 (feet) Two connectors for 32 ports
Four connectors for 63 ports
Output Mask Bellcore GR-499-core

E3 Interface
Line Rate 34.368 Mbps ± 20ppm Jitter ITU G.823
Line Code HDB3 Framing Unframed, G.751
Input Signal ITU G.703 Impedance 75 ohm coax
Output Signal ITU G.703 Connector BNC connector
Output Mask ETS 300 689 Sec.4.2.1.2 ITU
G.703

T3 interface
Line Rate 44.736 Mbps ± 20ppm Jitter ITU G.824
Line Code B3ZS Framing Unframed, M13/Mx3 (unframed
E1/T1), G.747
Input Signal ITU G.703 Impedance 75Ω coax
Output Signal ITU G.703 Connector BNC connector
Output Mask Bellcore GR-499-core

Fast Ethernet (FE) interface


Line Rate 10/100M bps Mapping n x VC12, n x VC3 or
n x VC4
Layer2 Protocol RSTP (802.1W), Connector RJ45
VLAN (802.1Q, 802.1P)
Flow Control (802.3X)
MSTP (802.1S)
IGMP Snooping
QoS
Process Protocol VCAT, GFP, LAPS, and LCAS and non-
LCAS

Gigabit Ethernet (GBE) interface


Line Rate 10/100/1000Mbps Mapping n x VC12, n x VC3 or
n x VC4
Layer2 Protocol RSTP (802.1W), Connector RJ45
VLAN (802.1Q, 802.1P)
Flow Control (802.3X)
MSTP (802.1S)
IGMP Snooping
QoS
Process Protocol VCAT, GFP, LAPS, LCAS and non-LCAS

System Clock
Clock Source Internal clock
4 aggregate lines clocks (STM-1/4 (OC-3/12))
8 tributary clocks
2 external clocks (2.048Hz or 2.048M bps for STM-1/4, 1.544M bps for OC-3/12)

Management Interface
LED Multi colors
Console Electrical: RS232, DCE
Connector: DB9, female
User interface: Menu driven VT-100
Telnet
SNMP SNMPv1, RFC1213
OSS interface 10/100BaseT FE (IEEE 802.3u )
NE/NE interface DCC/HDLC/PPP/Ethernet type II, In-band E1

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


6
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Alarm Input/Output
Inputs
Ports 4 Activation current 3 mA
Internal resistance 1K Deactivation current 1.5 mA
Connectors RJ45
Outputs
Ports 4 Max. rating of relay 3Vdc/1A; 125Vac/0.5A
Initial insul. resist. Min. 100M ohm (at 500Vdc)
Connectors RJ45

Diagnostics

Controller Card
Loopback Test Local loopback, payload loopback, line loopback:
BERT Test Optical interface Direction: to optical lines

B155/622 card
Loopback Test Local loopback, payload loopback, line loopback:
ERT Test Optical interface Direction: to optical lines

E1/T1 card
Loopback Test Local loopback, line loopback:
BERT Test E1/T1 interface Direction: to optical lines, to tributary lines

Performance Monitor
Performance Performance Parameters: Error Block (EB), Background Block Error (BBE), Error Second
Reports (ES), Burst Error Second (BES), Severe Error Second (SES), Unavailable Second
(UAS)

Alarm History System Alarm Alarm Cut Off, Power Loss/Uneqp, Fan Fail, Fan Module Uneqp, RBC
Uneqp Overheat, TS Sync Loss, Logon and Logoff, Optical Port Uneqp, Card
In, Card Out, Card Type Mismatch, Card Port Number Mismatch, Card Fail,
Card Registration, SNCP/UPSR Switch, MSP Switch, Trib Protection Sync,
Standby controller card Takeover, Standby Trib akeover, controller
card Sync, SFP Tx Fail, SFP Rx Fail, SFP Temperature
SDH/SONET SDH Line PI-LOS, RS-LOF, RS-TIM, RS-BIP UAS, MS-
Line Alarm SD, MS-SF, MS-AIS, MS-RDI, MS-BIP UAS,
MS-REI UAS

Ho-Path AU-LOP, AU-AIS, HP-SD, HP-SF, HP-TIM, HP-


UNEQ, HP-PLM, HP-RDI-S, HP-RDI-C, HP-RDI-
P, HP-BIP UAS, HP-REI UAS, LOM

Lo-Path TU-LOP, TU-AIS, LP-SD, LP-SF,

SONET Line LOS-PI, LOF-S, TIM-S, BIP-S UAS, SD-L , SF-


L , AIS-L , RDI-L , BIP-L UAS, REI-L UAS

STS-Path LOP-P, AIS-P, SD-P, SF-P, TIM-P, UNEQ-P,


PLM-P, RDI-S-P, RDI-C-P, RDI-P-P, BIP-P
UAS, REI-P UAS, LOM

VT-Path LOP-V, AIS-V, SD-V, SF-V

Alarm Queue Contains up to 300 alarm records of latest alarm types, alarm severity, date and time.

Power
AC and DC coexistent module 90 to 240Vac, 50/60Hz, -48Vdc (-36 to -72Vdc)

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


7
User’s Manual
O9400-R

DC module -48Vdc (-36 to -72Vdc)

Physical and Environmental


Dimensions for 6U 433mm x264mm x 223.5mm (W/H/D)
Temperature 0 to 50°C
Humidity 0-95%RH (non-condensing)
Mounting Desk-top stackable, 19/23 inch rack mountable

Standards Compliance
ITU-T G.707, G.7041, G.7042, G.775, G.783, G.806, G.823, G.747, X.86, G.664
ANSI T1.105, T1.107
802.1q (VLAN), 802.1w (RSTP), 802.1s(MSTP), 802.1ad (stack VLAN),
IEEE
802.3x (flow control), 802.1p (QoS)

Certification
EMC FCC Part 15 Subpart B, Class A; EN 55022, Class A; EN55024; EN300 386
Safety IEC60950-1/EN 60-950-1

NOTES: Non-Loop SFP modules are not guaranteed to work with our equipments. It is strongly
recommended to buy Loop-logo SFP modules.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


8
User’s Manual
O9400-R

2. INSTALLATION

2.1. Site Preparation


Ensure that your installation site conforms to all environmental and structural regulations. A
power supply must be available that conforms to the O9400R power requirements.

2.2. Mechanical Installation


Wear a grounding wrist strap while installing the Loop equipment. Familiarize yourself with
the instructions in this manual before commencing any work.

2.2.1. Installation Overview

When installing O9400R equipment into racks, follow these guidelines:


• Consider the effect of additional electronic equipment and its generated heat on the
O9400R system equipment.

• Make sure the equipment rack is properly secured to the ground and, if required, to
the ceiling.

• Ensure that the weight of the equipment does not make the rack unstable.

• When mounting equipment between two posts or rails, ensure that the minimum
clearance between the sides is 485 mm (19 in.).

• Maintain a minimum clearance of 500 mm (19.7 in.) in front of the equipment and
500mm (19.7 in.) at the rear.

• Maintain a minimum clearance of 44 mm (1U height) above and below the


equipment.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


9
User’s Manual
O9400-R

2.2.2. Power
The O9400R can be powered using AC/DC or DC (90 to 240 Vac, 50/60Hz or -48 Vdc (-36 to –
72Vdc)) Power cards are illustrated in Chapter 3 (Figures 3-1).

2.2.3. Rack Mounting Instruction

Rack mounting ears (brackets) and screws are included in the O9400R shipping package. Six
M3 screws are used to secure each ear to threaded screw-holes in the side panels of the Loop
device. These should be tightened to a torque value of 10Kgf-cm with a Phillips #2 screwdriver.

Figure 2-1 Rack Mount Ears (Brackets)

After the unit is placed into the rack cage insert flathead rack mounting screws (also included in
the shipping package) through each ear to secure the Loop unit to the cage. These screws
should be tightened to a torque value of 10Kgf-cm with a medium tip screwdriver.

Figure 2-2 Mounting the O9400R in a Rack

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


10
User’s Manual
O9400-R

2.2.4. Chassis Grounding


The chassis is grounded when rack mounted. However, if extra grounding protection for rack mounted units is desired, a dedicated
chassis ground screw and lock washer is provided. The chassis ground screw is located on the right hand side of the rear panel as
shown in Figure 2-3, below.

Chassis Ground Screw

Figure 2-3 Ground Screw Location

When attaching a ground wire to the chassis ground screw, please follow these instructions.

 Use copper grounding conductors of 18 AWG


 Conductors should not be of dissimilar metals.
 The bare conductors should be coated with anti-oxidant before crimp connections are made.
 Any unplated connection surfaces, connectors, braided strap and bus bars must be bought
to a bright finish and coated with anti-oxidant before connections are made.

2.2.5. Power Connection

The power connection on your unit will be either AC 90-240 Vac, 50—60Hz (3 pronged plug) or
DC –48Vdc (-36 to –72Vdc) 3 pin block. The power switch should be in the OFF position while
you connect the power source.

Caution: Do not (under any circumstances) connect the O9400R unit to a power source that is
inconsistent with the power rating labeled on the rear of the device. Do not (under
any circumstances) remove the power module from the O9400R device while it is
connected to live power source. Disconnect the module from the power source before
removing it from the O9400R.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


11
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Figure 2-4 DC Power With/Without Grounding Application

Figure 2-5 AC/DC Power With/ Without Grounding Application

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


12
User’s Manual
O9400-R

2.2.6. Fiber Optic Line Connections

To install fiber-optic cables in the O9400R, connect a fiber cable with an LC type connector
to the transmit and receive ports of the transmission system.

2.2.7. Console Port


The Console Port is located on the front panel of the Connector Card. For pinout details please
refer to Chapter 3, Table 3-2, DB9 Console Port Pinout Table.

Figure 2-6 DB9 Console Port

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


13
User’s Manual
O9400-R

2.2.8. Interface Block Diagram

The O9400R interface block diagram is shown in Figure 2-5, below.

XCU1(W) XCU2(E)
STM-1/4 STM-1/4 STM-1/4 STM-1/4
(OC-3/12) (OC-3/12) VC12 (OC-3/12) (OC-3/12)
with MSP 1+1 XC Fabric with MSP 1+1

Ethernet

(OC-3/12)
STM-1/4
E1/T1

E3/T3
or or or

378 48 FE 18 STM-1/4
E1/T1 or E3/T3 (OC-3/12)
6 GBE MSP 1+1
or Ring

Figure 2-7 Interface Block Diagram

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


14
User’s Manual
O9400-R

2.2.9. Configuration Type

There are five main configuration types. They are described below.

2.2.9.1. Two STM-4(OC-12) Main Rings Configuration

Tributary Protection
Switch Groups

O 9400-R
2 * Main STM-4 B15
5
Trib
#8 1* STM- 4 ( MSP1+1)
(OC-12 ) Rings
TB
4
S
TPSG
4

XCU2 B15
5 Trib #4
(EAST)
4
4
TB
S
#7
STM- 4 (OC-12)
Ring 1 P2
O/E
XC B15
5 Trib 252*E1/T1
( SNCP/ UPSR) Core 4
4
TB
S #6 or
O/E TPSG 12*E3/T3
P1 B15
5 Trib #3 or
4
TB
S
#5 32*FE
4

B15
Trib or
5
622M 6* STM- 1 (OC-3)
622M 4
TB
S
#4
TPSG MSP(1+1)
4

B15
5 Trib #2 or
XCU1 TB
4
4 S #3 1* STM- 4 (OC-12)
(WEST)
B15 Trib MSP(1+1)
5
TB #2
XC
4

STM- 4 (OC-12) P2
O/E 4 S

Ring 2 Core TPSG Note: STM- 4 (OC-12 ) is for


B15 Trib
( SNCP/ UPSR) O/E
5
TB
#1 Slots 7 & 8 only.
P1
4
4 S #1

Figure 2-8 Two STM-4 (OC-12) Main Rings Configuration

2.2.9.2. Two STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) Linear Chains Configuration

O 9400-R B155
Trib#8 O/E
STM1 P8-
2

TB
4
S STM1 P8-
4 O/E

XCU2 TP
S
1

G
#4 B155 STM1 P7- 1* STM- 1 (OC-3) , ( MSP1+1)
2 * STM-1/ 4 (OC-3/12) Linear Chains (EAST) Trib#7 O/E 2

4
4
TB
S O/E
STM1 P7-
1 252*E1/T 1
with MSP(1+1 ) Protection P
O/E
XC B155 STM1 P6- 1* STM- 1 (OC-3) , ( MSP1+1) or
Trib#6 O/E 2

STM-1/ 4 (OC-3/12 ) with MSP(1+1)


2
Core 4
4
TB
S STM1 P6-
12*E3/T 3
O/E 1
P
1
O/E TP
S
G
#3 B155 STM1 P5- 1* STM- 1 (OC-3) , ( MSP1+1) or
Trib#5 2
6* STM- 1 (OC-3 ) MSP(1+1)
O/E

TB STM1 P5-
4 S O/E 1

or
4

B155
Trib#4
STM1 P4- 1* STM- 1 (OC-3) , ( MSP1+1)
622M 622M TB
4 S
4
O/E 2

STM1 P4-
1* STM- 4 MSP(1+1)
O/E 1
TP
S
G

XCU1 #2B155
Trib#3 O/E STM1 P3-

(WEST)
4
4
TB
S
O/E
2
STM1 P3-
1 1* STM- 1 (OC-3) , ( MSP1+1) Note: STM- 4 (OC-12 ) is for
B155 STM1 P2-
Slots 7 & 8 only.
TB
Trib#2 O/E
2

P
O/E XC 4
4 S
O/E
STM1 P2-
1
TP
STM-1/ 4 (OC-3/12 ) with MSP(1+1) 2 Core G
S
#1B155
STM1 P1-
O/E TB Trib#1 O/E
2
P
1
4
4 S
O/E
STM1 P1-
1
1* STM- 1 (OC-3) , ( MSP1+1)

Figure 2-9 Two STM-1/4 (OC3/12) Linear Chains

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


15
User’s Manual
O9400-R

2.2.9.3. One STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) Main Ring with MSP(1+1)

O9400-R

TB
B 155
Trib#8
4 S

XCU2 S
G
4
TP
252*E1/T1
( EAST) #4 B 155
Trib#7
4
4
TB
S
or
O9400-R XC
O/E
Core
12*E3/T3
STM-1/ 4 (OC-3/12) P2
4
4
B 155

TB Trib#6 or
S
with MSP(1+1) O/E TP 32* FE
S
P1 G
#3 B 155
Trib#5 or
4
4
TB
S 6* STM -1( OC-3)
STM-1/4 B 155
MSP(1+1)
( OC-3/ 12) 622M 622M TB
Trib#4
4 S
4
TP or
SNCP / UPSR Ring S
G

XCU1
#2B 155
Trib#3
with MSP (1+1) ( WEST)
4
4
TB
S
1* STM- 4- OC- 12)
B 155
Trib#2 MSP(1+1)
O/E
XC 4
TB
S
STM-1/ 4 (OC-3/12) P2
4

TP

with MSP(1+1) Core S


G
#1B 155

P1
O/E
4
4
TB
S
Trib#1
O9400-R Note: STM- 4( OC-12 )is
for Slots 7 & 8 only.

Figure 2-10 One STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) Main Ring with MSP(1+1)

2.2.9.4. One Main STM1/4 (OC-3/12) Ring plus One Main STM-
1/4 (OC-3/12) Linear Chain Config.

One STM-1/4 (OC-3/12)


Main Ring O9400-R
B15
5
Trib
O/

+ 4
TB
S
#8 E
O/
4 E

XCU2 TP
Trib
One STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) (EAST)
S
G B15
#4 5
#7
O/
E
TB

Linear Chain 4
4
S
O/
E

252*E1/T1
O/
XC B15
Trib
or
E
P 5
2
Core 4
4
TB
S
#6
12*E3/T3
O/
STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) O/ TP
E

E
P
with MSP(1+1) 1
S
G B15
#3 5
Trib or
#5
4
4
TB
S
O/
E 32*FE
B15
5
Trib or
622M 622M 4
4
TB
S
#4 6*STM-1 (OC-3)
TP
S

XCU2
G
#2
B15
5
Trib MSP(1+1)
(WEST)
4
4
TB
S #3 or
B15 Trib
1*STM-4 (OC-12)
5
O/
XC 4
TB
S #2 MSP(1+1)
STM-1/4 (OC-3/12)
4
E
P TP
2 Core S
G
#1 B15 Trib
Ring with SNCP/UPSR P
O/
E
5
TB
4
4 S
#1 Note: STM-4 (OC-12) is
1
Protection for Slots 7 & 8 only.

Figure 2-11 One Main STM1/4 (OC-3/12) Ring plus One Main STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) Linear Chain Config.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


16
User’s Manual
O9400-R

2.2.9.5. Five Rings

O 9400 -R
2*STM-1/4 (OC-3/12)
O/ STM-1 (OC-3)
Rings 4
Trib #8 E STM1 P2
Sub-ring1
4 O/
XCU 2 TP E STM1 P1

(EAST) SG
#4
Trib #7 O/
STM-1 (OC-3)
STM1 P2

4
E
Sub-ring2
4 O/
STM1 P1
E

O/
E VC 12
P2 XC Fabric Trib
STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) 4 #6
O/
E STM1 P2 STM-1 (OC-3)
4
Sub-ring3
SNCP/UPSR Ring O/
TP
O/
E
STM1 P1
E
P1 SG
#3
Trib #5 O/
STM1 P2
E

4 O/
4
E STM1 P1

Trib O/
622M 622M #4 E
STM1 P2 3*STM-1
4
4

TP
O/
STM1 P1
(OC-3)
E
XC
1
SG
Tri
Rings
U #2
(WEST) b O/
E STM1 P2
4 #3
4
O/
E STM1 P1

O/
Trib #2 E STM1 P2
O/ 4
4

STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) P2
E
VC12
XC Fabric
TP
O/
E
STM1 P1
SG
SNCP/UPSR Ring O/
#1
O/
E 4
Trib #1 E STM1 P2
P1 4

O/
STM1 P1
E

Figure 2-12 Five Rings

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


17
User’s Manual
O9400-R

2.3. Card Types and Capacities


Table 2-1 STM-1/4 (OC3/12) aggregate line
In this table, STM-4 could also be OC-12; STM-1 could also be OC-3; E1 could also be T1; and E3
could also be T3.

SLOTS TRIB 1 TRIB 2 TRIB 3 TRIB 4 XCU1(W) XCU2(E) TRIB 5 TRIB 6 TRIB7 TRIB 8

GLOBAL 2 x 155M N/A 4 X 155M N/A


PAYLOAD 155M 155M 8 x 155M 8 x 155M
SDH 1 x 155M 1 x 155M 2 x 155M 2 x 155M
Tributary (Plug-in Modules)
STM-1/4 STM-1/4 STM-1 STM-1
STM-1 N/A STM-1 N/A STM-1 STM-1
(2 ports) (2 ports) (2 ports) (2 ports)
Link without STM-1/4 STM-1/4
STM-1 N/A STM-1 N/A STM-1 STM-1 STM-4 N/A
MSP (2 ports) (2 ports)
STM-1/4 STM-1/4 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1
STM-1 N/A STM-1 N/A N/A
(2 ports) (2 ports) (2 ports) (2 ports) (2 ports)
STM-1 STM-1
STM-1/4 STM-1/4 STM-1 STM-1
STM-1 STM-1(B) STM-1 STM-1(B) (2 ports) (2 ports)
(2 ports) (2 ports) (2 ports) (2 ports)
Link with (B) (B)
MSP (1+1) STM-1
STM-1/4 STM-1/4 STM1-1
STM-1 STM-1(B) STM-1 STM-1 (B) (2 ports) STM-4 STM-4 (B)
(2 ports) (2 ports) (2 ports)
(B)
Link with
STM-1/4 STM-1/4 STM-1 STM-1
SNCP Ring N/A N/A N/A N/A STM-1 STM-1
(2 ports) (2 ports) (2 ports) (2 ports)
CONNECTOR

*See Note 1
Link with
SNCP Ring & STM-1/4 STM-1/4
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
MSP (1+1) (2 ports) (2 ports)
*See Note 2

Max 378 E1
63 E1 N/A 63 E1 N/A 63 E1 63 E1 63 E1 63 E1
(Single)

Max 252 E1
63 E1 63 E1 (B) 63E1 63 E1 (B) 63 E1 63 E1 (B) 63 E1 63 E1 (B)
(Protection)

Max. 18 E3
3 E3 N/A 3 E3 N/A 3 E3 3 E3 3 E3 3 E3
(Single)

Max 12 E3
3 E3 3 E3 (B) 3 E3 3 E3 (B) 3 E3 3 E3 (B) 3 E3 3 E3 (B)
(Protection)

Max 48
8x10/100 8x10/100B 8x10/100B 8x10/100
10/100 BT 8x10/100BT 8x10/100BT
BT 1 x N/A N/A T 1x T 1x BT 1 x
6x 1000BT 1 x 1000BT 1 x 1000BT
1000BT 1000BT 1000BT 1000BT
(Single)
Max 32 8x10/100
8x10/100 8x10/100B 8x10/100B 8x10/100B
10/100 BT 8x10/100BT 8x10/100BT 1 x 8x10/100BT BT 1 x
BT 1 x T 1x T 1x T 1x
4 x 1000 BT 1 x 1000BT 1000BT (B) 1 x 1000BT 1000BT
1000BT 1000BT (B) 1000BT (B) 1000BT
(Protection) (B)

NOTES: 1. (B) backup/protection


XCU1(W) port 1 and XCU2(E) port 1 form Ring #1
XCU1(W) port 2 and XCU2(E) port 2 form Ring #2
2. Trib5 port 1 and Trib6 port 1 form Ring #3
Trib7 port 1 and Trib8 port 1 form Ring #4
Trib7 port 2 and Trib8 port 2 form Ring #5
Total Capacity 5 Rings.
XCU1(W) port 1 and XCU2(E) port 1 with MSP (1+1) protection
3. XCU1(W) port 2 and XCU2(E) port 2 with MSP (1+1) protection
XCU1(W) port 1 and XCU2(E) port 2 form a ring
These four ports form one STM-1/4 Main Ring with MSP (1+1) protection

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


18
User’s Manual
O9400-R

3. INTERFACES

3.1. Power
The O9400R supports two types of power supply modules.

• Single DC plug-in power supply module: -48 Vdc (-36 to –72 Vdc)
• AC/DC plug-in power supply: AC (90 to 240 Vac, 50/60Hz, ) / DC (- 36 to -72Vdc)

Figure 3-1 Power Modules (-48Vdc and AC/DC)


Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.
19
User’s Manual
O9400-R

3.1.1. Power module, -48Vdc


The -48Vdc (-36 to –72 Vdc) supply input is as illustrated in Figure 3-1 above. It has a 3 pin
power connector with the following pin-out:

Table 3-1 Pin-out for -48 DC Connector


Pin-out for -48 DC
Pin Signal
+ +48
- -48V
GND

3.2. Connector Card


The O9400R Connector Card is illustrated below. It features the following interfaces:
DB9 Console Port;

NOTES: RJ45 connectors are for Alarm Output, Alarm Input, Clock Input/Output, and
UNUSED.
DB25 Connectors are for RBC (Relay Bus Connector).

Figure 3-2 Connector Card

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


20
User’s Manual
O9400-R

3.2.1. VT-100 Terminal Interface


The O9400R offers a console port interface for connecting a VT-100 monitor. The interface runs
at a data rate of 9600 baud. Pinout details are displayed in Table 3-2, below.

Table 3-2 DB9 Console Port Pinout Table


Pin Number Signal Source
1 Data Carrier Detect To DTE
2 Receive Data To DTE
3 Transmit Data From DTE
4 Unassigned
5 Signal Ground
6 Data Set Ready To DTE
7 Unassigned
8 Clear to send To DTE
9 Unassigned

3.2.2. Alarm Interface


The O9400R provides facilities to report a minimum of 4 auxiliary alarm inputs for associated
equipment, e.g. power unit failure battery condition, cabinet door etc. and 4 dedicated alarm
outputs. The alarm outputs are related to the unit alarm indicator and the traffic alarm indicator.
The alarm inputs are reported to the management system and are activated by a closed
or open Loop condition between a pair of contacts. Please see for details.

3.2.3. Alarm Input Jumper Setup


 We have two environment options for alarm input: external power and internal power.
 Jumper setting for internal power is set on default along with shipping package.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


21
User’s Manual
O9400-R

O9400 Alarm Input Jumper

Alarm Input Jumper Setup


Internal Power External Power (3.3V~5V)

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


22
User’s Manual
O9400-R

3.2.3.1. Connectors of Alarm Interface

The alarm input interface connector is a RJ-45 connector. The pinout is defined in the table
below.

Table 3-3 Pin-out for Alarm Input Connector


Pin-out for Alarm Input
Connector
PIN Signal
1 Alarm input 1
POWER
2 Alarm input 1 GND
3 Alarm input 2
POWER
4 Alarm input 2 GND
5 Alarm input 3
POWER
6 Alarm input 3 GND
7 Alarm input 4
POWER
8 Alarm input 4 GND

The alarm output interface connector is a RJ-45 connector. Below is Alarm Output Table.

Table 3-4 Alarm Output Table

Circui Critical Major Minor Informative


t Pin 1, 2 Pin 3, 4 Pin 5, 6 Pin 7, 8
Condition
Normal Open Open Open Open
Alarm On Short Short Short Short

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


23
User’s Manual
O9400-R

3.2.4. External Timing Connector

External timing input and output is provided on 8 pin RJ-45 connector, with the following pin-out:

Table 3-5 RJ-45 Pinout for Clock Input/Output


RJ-45 Pinout for Clock Input/Output
PIN Signal Ring or Tip
1 EXT1 TX TIP
2 EXT1 TX RING
3 EXT1 RX TIP
4 EXT1 RX RING
5 EXT2 TX TIP
6 EXT2 TX RING
7 EXT2 RX TIP
8 EXT2 RX RING

3.3. Fiber Optic Connections


To install fiber-optic cables, connect a fiber cable with an LC type connector to transmit and
receive ports of the transmission system.

To set up an optical line, a SFP module and an optical cable are required.

Figure 3-3 SFP module


First install the SFP module into the cage on the plug-in card. Then, plug the optical cable into the SFP
module. The LED light will turn from red to green. The optical installation is now complete.

To view the SFP module information, please go to Controller Menu: I -> System Information 4 -
> Controller Card SFP Information.

The SFP with LC connector has DDM option. The SFP module with DDM (Digital Diagnostic Monitoring
functions) provides diagnostic functions such as: Temperature (CDA), Voltage, Bias Current, Tx
Power, and Rx Power paramerter info.
Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.
24
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Below screen shows Controller Card SFP Information: PORT1 is SFP without DDM; PORT2 is
SFP with DDM.

Uni t 5 S T M1 === XC U SF P I nfo rmat i on == = 17 :34: 28 04/ 11/2 014


SFP module with DDM
[--- --- --- ---- -- POR T1 - --- --- ---- --- -] [--- --- --- ---- -- POR T2 - --- --- ---- --- -]
Conn ect or : LC Conn ect or : LC
Tran sce ive r : OC 48, sin gle mo de L ONG . Tran sce ive r : OC 48, sin gle mo de i nte r.
Link Le ngt h : Not av aila ble Link Le ngt h : lon g d ista nce (L)
Tech nol ogy : Lon gwa ve l ase r(L L) Tech nol ogy : Lon gwa ve l ase r(L C)
Enco din g : SON ET scra mbl ed Enco din g : NRZ
Leng th( 9/1 25 u m f ibe r) : 12 0km Leng th( 9/1 25 m m f ibe r) : 20 000 m
Leng th( 50/ 125 um fib er) : -- -- Leng th( 50/ 125 mm fib er) : -- --
Leng th( 62. 5/12 5 u m f iber ) : -- -- Leng th( 62. 5/12 5 m m f iber ) : -- --
Date Co de : 2 014 -01 - 15, T empe rat ure : 49. 810 deg ree s C
Vend or Nam e:OE M Vcc : 3.29 1mV Tx P owe r:- 1.7d Bm
Vend or OUI :14 Tx B ias : 1 2.65 2mA Rx P owe r:- 40.0 dBm
Vend or PN : TE O-D W2G - S802 5 D ate Cod e :201 1- 0 7-0 8,
Vend or Rev :000 5 Vend or Nam e:AP AC Opt o
Wave Len gth : 15 57. 36 n m V endo r O UI :399 3
Vend or PN :LS3 8- E 3S- TC- N -DD
Vend or Rev :000 0
Wave Len gth :131 0

<< ESC ke y to re tur n to pr evi ous men u, SPAC E b ar to r efr esh >>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


25
User’s Manual
O9400-R

3.4. Controller Card (XCU Card)


3.4.1. Description
The Controller Card (also named XCU card) is shown below. This card is used for management and cross-connect functions.

Figure 3-4 Controller Card

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


26
User’s Manual
O9400-R

3.4.2. Controller Card LEDs


The Controller Card has multi-color LEDs for operation and error indications. The indication is either off,
steady on, or flickering (flashing). The following table lists each LED and its color and the meaning it
represents.
Table 3-6 LED Indicators for Controller Card
LED Indicators for Controller Card
LED Color Indication
ACTIVE Off Controller Card fails
Flashing Green Controller Card is Working
Flashing Amber Controller Card is Standby
ALM This LED is used to indicate alarm status: LOS, LOF, MS-AIS, MS-RDI,
AU-LOP, AU-AIS, LOP, AIS, SD, SF, RDI, PLM, TIM, UAS..., all paired
alarms about SDH/SONET.
Off Overall Alarm is disabled
Red Critical alarm message or Major alarm message occurs
Amber Minor alarm message occurs
Green Informative alarm message or no alarm message occurs
TEST Off Neither loopback nor diagnostics exist.
Flashing Amber Loopback or diagnostics exist.
ACO Off Normal
Red Any alarm occurs (For any alarm type)
P1 Off Normal
Red LOS occurs in Port 1
P2 Off Normal
Red LOS occurs in Port 2

3.4.3. Ethernet Interface


The 10/100 Ethernet Port has an RJ-45 Connector. The Pinout is listed below.
Table 3-7 RJ-45 Pinout for Ethernet Port
RJ-45 Pinout for Ethernet Port
Pin Signal Signal Direction
1 Transmit Data Output form
+ O9400R
2 Transmit Data Output form
- O9400R
3 Receive Data + Input to O9400R
4 No Connection
5 No Connection
6 Receive Data - Input to O9400R
7 No Connection
8 No Connection

3.4.4. Optical Connections


P1 and P2 each hold optical module housings. Customer selected optical connectors plug
directly into these housings.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


27
User’s Manual
O9400-R

3.5. Fan Tray


The fan tray is hot-pluggable. It goes into a horizontal slot at the top of the device. The tray
holds eight 12Vdc (3.3W) cooling fans. All fans are initially turned on when the O9400R is
powered up. They run for three seconds only as part of the initial self-test that the Loop-
O9400R goes through. After that, all cooling is controlled by a sensor in the Controller Card. It
turns banks of fans on or off depending upon the temperature of the Controller Card.

Figure 3-5 Fan Tray

Table 3-8 Fan Control Temperatures


Fan Control Temperatures
Cooling Fans Temp. at which fan banks Temp. at which fan banks
are turned on are turned off
Front Bank >40°C 30°C
(Fans 2, 4, 6 & 8)
Rear Bank >50°C, or if one of the fans 40°C
(Fans 1, 3, 5 & 7) in the front bank fails when
the temp is >40°C

3.6. Fanless Chassis


The O9400R has fanless chassis O9400-R-CHFLA. Please be noted that only fanless plug-in
modules work on the fanless chassis.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


28
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


29
User’s Manual
O9400-R

3.7. E1/T1
3.7.1. Brief Description
The E1/T1 Interface Card is a software selectable plug-in card. The E1 and T1 are configurable
through software. Depending upon manufacturing options there are Nx E1/T1 ports available,
where N=16/32/63TE or 16/32/63E75).

For specifications and operating information please refer to Loop-O9400R E1/T1 INTERFACE
USER’S MANUAL.

Figure 3-6 E1 (75 ohm) 16, 32 and 63 Port Interface Cards

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


30
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Figure 3-7 E1 (120 ohm)/T1 16, 32 and 63 Port Interface Cards

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


31
User’s Manual
O9400-R

3.8. E3/T3
3.8.1. Brief Description
The E3/T3 Interface Card is a software selectable plug-in card. It has three E3/T3 ports per
card and supports M13 function. The card is hot-swappable and can be installed in or removed
from a powered-up O9400R chassis. For specifications and operating information please refer
to O9400R E3/T3 INTERFACE USER’S MANUAL.

Figure 3-8 E3/T3 Interface Card

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


32
User’s Manual
O9400-R

3.9. STM-1/4 and OC-3/12 Interface Card

3.9.1. Brief Description


The STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) Interface Card is also known as a B155/622 card. STM-1/4 (OC-3/12)
is configurable through software. For specifications and operating information please refer to
B155/622 INTERFACE PLUG-IN CARD FOR Loop-O9400R USER'S MANUAL.

NOTES: Loop-O9400R Tributary Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6 are used for STM-1 and OC-3.
Loop-O9400R Tributary Slots 7& 8 are used for STM-4 and OC-12.

Figure 3-9 B155 /622 Interface Card

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


33
User’s Manual
O9400-R

3.10. Cards Installation


Fan
Tray

Power Modules XCU1(W) XCU2 (E)


Connector

3.10.1. Controller Card Installation

- Two slots for controller card (XCU1 & XCU2)


- Procedure for installing controller cards:
Step 1 Take out the controller card from the antistatic bag.
Step 2 Insert the edges of the controller card into the rail guides in corresponded slot.
Step 3 Slide the controller card into the chassis until it stops.
Step 4 Press the controller card into the slot so that the front panel is flush with the chassis. Do
not force the card into the slot because this may damage the pins in the card.
Step 5 Secure the controller card in the chassis by pushing the ejector levers in so it locks in
place. Do not force the ejectors in because this may damage the pins in the card.
Step 6 Use a screwdriver to tighten the screws in the latching chassis in order to secure the
card to the mechanism.

3.10.2. Plug-in Card Installation

- Eight regular size slots and one connector module (If you have question about connector card,
please go to 3.2)
- Procedure for installing plug-in cards:
Step 1 Take out the plug-in card from the antistatic bag.
Step 2 Insert the edges of the plug-in card into the rail guides in corresponded slot.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


34
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Step 3 Slide the plug-in card into the chassis until it stops.
Step 4 Press the plug-in card into the slot so that the front panel is flush with the chassis. Do
not force the card into the slot because this may damage the pins in the card.
Step 5 Secure the plug-in card in the chassis by pushing the ejector levers in so it locks in
place. Do not force the ejectors in because this may damage the pins in the card.
Step 6 Use a screwdriver to tighten the screws in the latching chassis in order to secure the
card to the mechanism.

3.10.3. Cards Replacement

There are two main activities for replacing the cards for the Loop devise: Remove the old card
and then install the new one. Please follow below step-by-step procedures.

3.10.3.1. Remove the Old Cards

Below steps instruct how to remove the old cards including controller cards as well as plug-in
cards.
Step 1 Locate the old card.
Step 2 Use a screwdriver to loosen the captive screws that secure the card to the chassis.
Step 3 Pull the card out of the chassis.
NOTES: It may result in static damage when handling the cards. Please utilize an
antistatic wrist strap, static-dissipating work surface, and antistatic bags when
dealing with them.

3.10.3.2. Install the New Controller Card

After you remove the old card, follow below steps to install a new Controller Card.
Step 1 Take out the new controller card from the antistatic bag.
Step 2 Insert the edges of the controller card into the rail guides in corresponded slot.
Step 3 Slide the controller card into the chassis until it stops.
Step 4 Press the controller card into the slot so that the front panel is flush with the chassis.
Step 5 Secure the controller card in the chassis by pushing the ejector levers in so it locks in
place. Do not force the ejectors in because this may damage the pins in the card.
Step 6 Use a screwdriver to tighten the screws in the latching chassis in order to secure the
card to the mechanism.

If user replaces both controller cards at the same time, the new controller card will start with
default configuration. On the other hand, if the backup controller card is replaced by a new one,
and the hardware/firmware/brand of the new controller card is the same to the working
controller card, then the configuration on the new controller card will synchronize to the working
controller card automatically.

NOTES: You can see Controller Card Protection status on the screen; see below
table for status explanation. More information: See below.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


35
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Table 3-9 Description for Controller Card Protection Status


Controller Card Description
Protection:
Version Mismatch The versions for 2 controller cards do not match,
please check.
No Redundant Card There is only 1 controller card, please insert the
other one.
Wait to Sync Controller cards are waiting to be synced, please
wait.
During Sync Controller cards are now communicating, please
wait.
Redundant Ready The system is ready to use.

3.10.3.3. Install the New Plug-in Card

After you remove the old card, follow below steps to install a new plug-in card.
Step 1 Take out the new card from the antistatic bag.
Step 2 Insert the edges of the card into the rail guides in corresponded slot.
Step 3 Slide the card into the chassis until it stops.
Step 4 Press the plug-in card into the slot so that the front panel is flush with the chassis.
Step 5 Secure the plug-in card in the chassis by pushing the ejector levers in so it locks in
place. Do not force the ejectors in because this may damage the pins in the card.
Step 6 Use a screwdriver to tighten the screws in the latching chassis in order to secure the
card to the mechanism.

If the same type plug-in card is inserted, no additional configuration changes are required. The
O9400R system will apply old card’s configuration to the new one automatically.

When a plug-in card is removed and replaced with a plug-in card of a different type, the system
will not initiate the plug-in card automatically to prevent user’s mistake. User has to initiate the
new type of plug-in card manually. Once the new plug-in card is activated, default configuration
is assigned to the new plug-in card. The user must set the configuration for each change of
plug-in card type.

- Steps to check plug-in card registration information: go to 6.40.2

3.10.4. Cards Removal


This section guides you how to remove controller card and plug-in cards.

Step 1 Locate the old card.


Step 2 Use a screwdriver to loosen the captive screws that secure the card to the chassis.
Step 3 Pull the card out of the chassis.
Step 4 Put the old card into the antistatic bag.
NOTES: It may result in static damage when handling the cards. Please utilize an
antistatic wrist strap, static-dissipating work surface, and antistatic bags when
dealing with them.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


36
User’s Manual
O9400-R

4. CLOCK TIMING

4.1. Clock Synchronization Overview


4.1.1. Primary Timing Path
Each national digital network must maintain a national master clock, accurate to one part in 1011.
This clock is distributed through the digital communications network over designated primary
distribution paths. Clocks traveling as a signal from one node to the next are commonly called
line clocks.

For example, suppose the digital network consists of nodes and interconnecting paths where M
is the national master clock, J, K and L are primary nodes, and A, B, C, D, E, F and G are
secondary nodes.

The timing signal from M is designed to travel only on designated paths and on no others, as
indicated by the solid lines shown below. Note that for each node, the timing path traces back
to the master clock M in one and only one path. Otherwise, conflicts and ambiguities arise.

J K L

A B C D E F G

Figure 4-1 Primary Timing Path in a Digital Network

4.1.2. Timing Path Protection


In addition to the designated primary timing path, network designers must also have a
contingency timing plan in case any of the nodes or any of the transmission systems traversed
by the primary path should fail. To this end, all nodes in the network are given a timing rank.
Any potential timing path is rated according to the number of intermediate nodes traversed and
the rank of these nodes.

For example, if the timing path from M to J should fail, node J would switch to the secondary
timing source from node K. At the same time, node C would switch its timing source from node
Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.
37
User’s Manual
O9400-R

J to node K. This is because, by using timing from K, node C would be one node closer to M
than by using J.

J K L

A B C D E F G
Figure 4-2 Timing Path Protection in a Digital Network (1)

4.1.3. Timing Choices for Transport Systems

A node in the transmission path must be able to receive and sync to an upstream primary and
secondary clock source and also provide a clock to a downstream node. One method of doing
this is to use Synchronization Status Messaging (SSM).

SSM is a protocol that communicates information about the quality of the timing source. SSM
messages are carried on the S1 byte of the SDH/SONET overhead. They enable devices to
automatically select the highest quality timing reference and to avoid timing loops.
They also ensure that higher stratum clocks are never slaved to lower stratum clocks; maintain
traceability to an identifiable primary clock reference source; and ensure that all Network
Elements have both a primary source and a secondary source in case of a primary failure

4.2. Clock Timing on the O9400R


As illustrated in the figure below, the timing sources for the O9400R are:

Internal Clock: This is used as a backup in case the upstream clock source fails or is degraded.
Internal clock accuracy is 4.6 ppm

XCU2(E) Line Clock (SSM)

XCU1(W) Line Clock (SSM)

2 External Clocks: These connect to the controller card. Selectable timing choices are: 2.048
Mbps, 2.048 MHz, or 1.544 Mbps.

Tributary Clocks: E1/T1 & E3/T3 (One clock per port. Fixed clock quality setting.) B155/622
(SSM over S1 byte)

NOTES: In below diagram, XCU1 & XCU2 are controller cards.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


38
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Internal
XCU1(West) Clock XCU2(East)
optical fiber optical fiber
Line Clock (SSM) Line Clock (SSM)

External Clock External Clock


(three options) (three options)

E1 E1
or or
T1 T1
or Tributary Clocks or
(two options)
2MHz 2MHz
E1/T1
B155/622
E3/T3

External Clock:
E1 - 2.048 Mbps, Tx/Rx
T1 - 1.544 Mbps, Tx/Rx (fixed clock quality) (SSM)
2 MHz - Rx only

Figure 4-3 O9400R Clock Timing


Per G.811, the clock quality can be distributed to and derived from the XCU2(E) Line, XCU1(W)
Line, and Plug-in B155/622 card by using SSM (Synchronization Status Message) over S1 byte.
The SSM message is carried over S1 bytes on the two STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) aggregate lines.
The clock quality can be distributed and derived from the External Timing interfaces by using
SSM over Sa bit.

For plug-in E1/T1 card or E3/T3 Card Timing interfaces, the SSM messaging of clock quality is
not supported. Instead, the clock quality of plug-in E1/T1 card or E3/T3 Card Timing is user
configurable and static once set. In summary, the clock sources with SSM support XCU2(E) &
XCU1(W) and plug-in B155/622 card timing and External timing are defined as Dynamic-
Quality Clock Group. While the clock sources (Tributary E1/T1 or E3/T3 card timing, & Internal
timing) with fixed clock quality are defined as Fixed-Quality Clock Group

NOTES: For plug-in E1/T1 card and E3/T3 card, the SSM messaging of clock quality
1. is not supported. For plug-in B155/622 card, the SSM messaging is
supported.
Optionally, the system can be dynamically locked to a clock source based on
2.
the quality, either of dynamic or of fixed type, of the enabled clock sources.

4.2.1. Clock Priority

In addition to clock quality, the O9400R accepts user programmable priority setting for each
clock input.

NOTES: Optionally, the O9400R can also do clock selection strictly based on the
priorities set by the user.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


39
User’s Manual
O9400-R

In summary, there are 3 clock selection modes supported on Loop-O9400R. They are listed
below.

• Strictly Priority Based Revertive  denoted as Revertive mode


• Strictly Priority Based Nonrevertive  Denoted as Non-Revertive mode
• SSM + Priority  SSM mode

If Revertive is chosen as the clock selection mode, then the system clock selection will be
strictly based on the availability and priority of each interface. A valid clock with the highest
priority among the available clocks will be chosen. The clock quality will be ignored in this
mode. Obviously, Revertive means the clock source will be switch back to the interface of
higher priority when it’s recovered from failure. If all the clock inputs become unavailable, then
the system will enter Clock Hold-over mode.

If Non-Revertive is chosen as the clock selection mode, then the behavior will be exactly the
same as Revertive mode, except the switch back activity, described above. Even though a
clock input with higher priority is recovered from failure, the system clock source will NOT be
switch from existing locked source with lower priority to the higher one.

If the SSM clock mode is chosen, then the clock source selection decision will be based on
• the SSM clock quality received from XCU2(E) and XCU1(W) STM-1/4 (OC-3) lines, External
Timing and plug-in B155/622 card Timing interfaces.
• the clock quality of the clock source with highest priority, if any, within the Fixed-Quality
Clock Group

The O9400R system will be locked to the clock input with higher clock quality (lower value).

NOTES: 1. Hold-over means that when clock loss occurs, the PLL (Phase Lock Loop) will
synchronize clock phases so no data glitches occur during clock reference
switchover from primary to secondary or vice versa.
2. When in the SSM clock mode with MSP 1+1 protection on, the clock source
selection will be limited. With MSP (1+1) protection, the protection pairs on
XCU (W) and XCU (E) are as follow:
XCU1(W) XCU2(E)
XCU (W) port XCU1(W) XCU2(E)
XCU (W) port 1
1 and XCU (E) and XCU (W)
P2 P2 port 1 in a pair P2 P2
port 2 in a pair

P1 P1
XCU (W) port XCU (E) port 1
2 and XCU (E) P1 P1
and XCU (E)
port 2 in a pair port 2 in a pair

In the case of pairing up XCU (W) port 1 with XCU (E) port 1 and XCU (W)
port 2 with XCU (E) port 2, the primary clock source will be limited to the
XCU1 (W) port 1 or XCU1 (W) port 2.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


40
User’s Manual
O9400-R

5. SYSTEM OPERATIONS
OVERVIEW

This purpose of this chapter is to provide a general guide to and overview of O9400R system
operations. For detailed setup instructions please refer to Chapter 6, SYSTEM SETUP.
The O9400R provides comprehensive report and configuration capability through the console
port. By using single-character commands and arrow keys, the O9400R and its interface cards
can be configured and monitored through the use of a VT-100 terminal. The single-character
commands are not case sensitive. On each screen, the available commands and the
configurable fields are highlighted.

When a VT-100 terminal is connected to the CONSOLE port of the O9400R, a main menu is
displayed on the VT-100 monitor. The main menu consists of four groups of commands,
DISPLAY, LOG, SETUP, and MISC. All commands are detailed in the VT-100 Controller Menu
Tree illustrations below.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


41
User’s Manual
O9400-R

VT-100 Controller
Menu Tree Overview

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]

C > System Config Display S > System Config. Setup

D > SDH/SONET Config Display H > SDH/SONET Config Setup

I > System Information M > Alarm Setup

Q > Alarm Queue L > File Transfer

B > Currently Active Alarm Summary V > Store/Retrieve Backup Cfg.

A > Current Alarm Status G > Loopback Diagnost. Setup

P > SDH/SONET Performance R > Performance Setup/Clear

T > System Log N > Unit Registration

E > Diagnostics Display

[LOG] [MISC]
Y > Alarm Cutoff
F > Log off
Z > Reset
O > Logon
X > Clear Alm. Queue
U > Choose a Trib Unit
W > Return to Default

Note: See following pages for more details

Figure 5-1 VT-100 Menu Tree Overview

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


42
User’s Manual
O9400-R

VT-100 Controller Menu Tree


LOG and MISC. Sections

[LOG] [MISC]

F > Log off Y > Alarm Cutoff


A > System Reset
O > Logon Z > Reset
B > XCU Reset

U > Choose a Trib Unit X > Clear Alm. Queue

W > Return to Default


Note: Choose A Unit menu tree varies
depending upon which card is plugged
into the tributary slot and registered.
See individual card manuals for menu tree
details.

Figure 5-2 VT-100 Menu Tree – LOG and MISC. Sections

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


43
User’s Manual
O9400-R

VT-100 Controller Menu Tree


[DISPLAY] Section

C> System Config D > SDH/ SONET


I> System Information
Display Config
1 > XCU Information
A > System Display A > System Mode Display .
2 > Tributary Card Information
B > SNMP Display B > Overhead Display
1 > Line Overhead Display 3 > Power & FAN Status
C > Timing Source 4 > XCU SFP Information
2 > HO-Path/STS-Path Overhd. Disp
D > Customer Information Display 5 > Firmware Bank Information
C> Cross Connect Display
E > SNTP Display Q > Alarm Queue
D> ALS/ APSD Display
F > DHCP Relay Display B >Currently -Active Alarm Summary
E> DCC Channel Display A > Current Alarm Status
G > Bridge and Router Display
F> Path Granularity
A > Network Interface I Display A >Line Alarm Status
B > Network Interface II Display G> MSP Status B > Hi-Ord/STS Path Alm Status
C > Static Route Display C > Low-Ord/VT Path Alm Status
D > Bridge Spanning Tree I H> Protection Switch Group Display
D > External Alm Status
E > Bridge Spanning Tree II I> Active Map Display
H > Hand-waving LED Display P > SDH/SONET Performance
J> SNCP/UPSR Status
[Section/Line]
1 > 01-Hr Line Perf
2 > 24-Hr Line Perf
3 > 07-Day Line Perf
[HO-Path/STS Path]
4 > 01-Hr HO-Path/STS-Path Perf
5 > 24-Hr HO-Path/STS-Path Perf
6 > 07-Day HO-Path/STS-Path Perf
[LO-Path/VT Path]
7 > 01-Hr LO-Path/VT-Path Perf
8 > 24-Hr LO-Path/VT-Path Perf
9 > 07-Day LO-Path/VT-Path Perf
T > System Log
E > Diagnostics Display
Figure 5-3 VT-100 Menu Tree – DISPLAY Section

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


44
User’s Manual
O9400-R

VT- 100 Controller Menu Tree


[ SETUP ] Section

S> System Config. Setup H > SDH / SONET Config Setup M > Alarm Setup

A > System Setup A > System Mode Setup A > System Alarm Setup I
B > SNMP Setup B > Overhead Setup B > System Alarm Setup II
A> SNMP System Setup A > Line Overhead Setup
C > Line Alarm Mask /Relay Setup
B > V 1 Commmunity & Trap Setup B > HO- Path / STS - Path Overhead
D > HO /STS Path Alarm Mask /Relay Setup
C > V3 User-Base Security Model Setup
C > Cross Connect Create
E > LO /VT Path Alarm Mask /Relay Setup
D > V3 View-Base Access Control Model Setup1
D > Cross Connect Delete
E > V3 View-Base Access Control Model Setup2 F > SDH /SONET Alarm Severity Setup
E > ALS/APSD Setup
F > V3 Target & Notify Setup G > External Alarm Setup
G > Load degaul SNMPV3 Settings F > DCC Channel Setup
H > SD /SF Threshold Setup
C > Password Setup G >Path Granularity
I > Insert AIS Alarm Setup
D > Timing Source H > MSP APS Command J> Alarm Output Setup
J > Map Change
E > Customer Info. Setup
K > Map Delete
F > SNTP Setup
L > Map Copy
G> DHCP Relay Setup
M > SNCP/UPSR APS Setup
H> Bridge and Router Setup
A > SNCP/UPSR APS Command
A > Network Interface Setup I
B > SNCP/UPSR Revertive Setup
B > Network Interface Setup II
C > SNCP/UPSR AIS Insert Setup
C > Static Route Setup
D > P/UPSR WTR Setup
D > Bridge Span. Tree Setup I
E > SNCP/UPSR UNEQP Setup
E > Bridge Span. Tree Setup II
N > Idle Path Alarm Insertion Setup
I > Hand- waving LED Setup
O > Path-protected TSA Setup
J > SSH Setup P > Clear XCU Port Cross Connect
K > M13 Setup

L > RADIUS Setup

L > File Transfer V > Store / Retrieve Backup Config R> Performance Setup / Clear
C> Clear Performance Data
A > Download Mainboard Firmware
G> Loopback Diagnost. Setup D> Performance Threshold Setup
B> Download Current Config
A> XCU Port Loopback Test N> Unit Registration
C> Download Backup Config
B > XCU Diagnostics
E> Upload Current Config from FLASH
F> Upload Backup Config from FLASH

G> Change Firmware Boot Bank


H> Copy Firmware to other XCU

Figure 5-4 VT-100 Menu Tree – SETUP Section

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


45
User’s Manual
O9400-R

5.1. Logon and Password Setup


Upon power-up the O9400R device will run through a quick self-test. When that is completed a
partial Controller Menu will appear on your VT-100 monitor screen. You must log on to see the
whole menu. (A complete screen has [DISPLAY], [SETUP], [LOG} and [MISC]} sections.

Logging on as OPERATOR, OPERATOR1, OPERATOR2 or OPERATOR3 will allow you to


view [DISPLAY] and [LOG] screens only. You must logon as ADMIN to be able to set up
device and card configurations. Detailed logon and password setup instructions are given in
Chapter 6.

5.1.1. Display
[DISPLAY] allows an operator or administrator to view (but not change) system configuration.

5.1.2. Setup
[SETUP] allows an administrator (only) to view existing configurations and set up new ones.

5.1.3. Log
[LOG] allows an administrator (only) to access Alarm Cutoff, System Reset, Clear Alarm Queue
and Return to Default functions.

5.1.4. MISC
[MISC] allows an operator or administrator to Log On, Log Off, or Choose a Trib Unit (ie. a card
plugged into a Tributary slot).

5.2. System Configuration Setup


5.2.1. System Setup
The purpose of system setup is to set up the Time/Date, IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway IP,
and Console Port (ie. Baud Rate, Data Length, Stop Bit and Parity). Detailed setup
instructions are given in Chapter 6.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


46
User’s Manual
O9400-R

5.2.2. SNMP System Config Setup


The purpose of SNMP Setup is to record the system location and contact information, set up
the Community and set up Trap IPs. Detailed setup instructions are given in Chapter 6.

5.2.3. Timing Source Setup


The Timing Source Setup is to select your clock mode (revertive, nonrevertive or SSM) and
establish a clock source priority list. Detailed setup instructions are given in Chapter 6.

5.2.4. Customer Information Setup


The Customer Information setup screen allows you to input the customer id name for various
ports. Detailed setup instructions are given in Chapter 6.

5.2.5. SNTP Setup


SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol. This is to set up the time zone your
device is operating in. Detailed setup instructions are given in Chapter 6.

5.2.6. DHCP Relay Setup


This is to activate the DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) relay. Detailed setup
instructions are given in Chapter 6.

5.2.7. Bridge and Router Setup


This is to set up network interfaces, static route and spanning trees. Detailed setup instructions
are given in Chapter 6.

5.2.8. Hand-waving LED Setup


This is to start or stop hand-waving LED operation and to set a timer. This operation is to
indicate which O9400R unit we are presently controlling. Detailed setup instructions are given
in Chapter 6.

5.2.9. SSH Setup


SSH is an acronym for Secure Shell. Setup involves turning the SSH server on or off. Detailed
setup instructions are given in Chapter 6.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


47
User’s Manual
O9400-R

5.2.10. M13 Setup


M13 function in O9400R only supports unframed E1/T1. This setup is used to enable or disable
the M13 function on E3/T3 card. Detail setup instruction is given in Chapter 6.

5.2.11. RADIUS Setup


This function is to support Radius client function for user to login by the account registered at
Radius Server via console port of O9400R or remote login.. Detail setup instruction is given in
Chapter 6.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


48
User’s Manual
O9400-R

5.3. SDH/SONET Configuration Setup


5.3.1. System Mode Setup
This is used to set up your system mode as either SDH or SONET. It is also used to set up
SNCP/UPSR or MSP 1+1 protection.

ADM (Add/Drop Multlipler) is set up as a ring. TM (Terminal Multiplexer) is linear.

ADM

TM

For detailed information on protection types please refer t o Chapter 8, O9400R TOPOLOGY
AND PROTECTION TYPES.

Detailed setup instructions are given in Chapter 6. Refer to Chapter 8 for an explanation

5.4. Overhead Setup


This is to set up Line Overhead and HO(higher order)-Path/STS(synchronous transport signal)-
Path Overhead. Detailed setup instructions are given in Chapter 6.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


49
User’s Manual
O9400-R

5.5. Cross Connect Create


This allows setup of SDH/SONET advanced cross-connect maps. Detailed setup instructions
are given in Chapter 6.

5.6. Cross Connect Delete


This allows a user to delete part of a map. Detailed setup instructions are given in Chapter 6.

5.7. ALS/APSD Setup


ALS is an acronym for Automatic Laser Shutdown. APSD is an acronym for Automatic Power
Shut Down. ALS/APSD follows standards set out in G.664. Detailed setup instructions are
given in Chapter 6.

5.8. DCC Channel Setup


DCC is an acronym for Data Communication Channel. Detailed setup instructions are given in
Chapter 6.

5.9. Path Granularity Setup


The is to set up the granularity of the SDH/SONET path. Detailed setup instructions are given
in Chapter 6.

5.10. MSP APS Command


MSP is an acronym for Multiplexer Section Protection. APS is an acronym for Automatic
Protection Switching. Detailed setup instructions are given in Chapter 6.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


50
User’s Manual
O9400-R

5.11. Map Change


This is to change the currently active cross-connect map from Map 1 to Map 2 and vice-versa.
Detailed setup instructions are given in Chapter 6.

5.12. Map Delete


This is to delete an existing cross-connect map. Detailed setup instructions are given in Chapter
6.

5.13. Map Copy


Map copy allows the user to copy an existing cross-connect map to the other. Detailed setup
instructions are given in Chapter 6.

5.14. SNCP/UPSR APS Command


SNCP is an acronym for Sub Network Connection Protection for SDH, and UPSR is an
acronym for Unidirectional Path Switched Ring for SONET. APS is an acronym for Automatic
Protection Switching. Detailed setup instructions are given in Chapter 6.

5.15. Idle Path Alarm Insertion Setup


The Idle Path Alarm Insertion Setup allow user to set up an alarm when cross connect is not
activate. Detailed setup instructions are given in Chapter 6.

5.16. Path-protected TSA (Time Slot


Assignment) Setup
This allows SNCP/UPSR Ring setup. Detailed setup instructions are given in Chapter 6.
Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.
51
User’s Manual
O9400-R

5.17. Clear Controller Card Port Cross


Connect
This function is to allow all the cross connects that are related to the selected port will be
cleared in both MAP1 and MAP2.

5.18. Alarm Setup


5.18.1. Alarm Type Overview
Alarm Setup allows the setup of nine different types of alarms. These alarm types are
described in the table below.

Table 5-1 Alarm Setup Table


Alarm Type
System Alarm Setup I
System Alarm Setup II
Line Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
HO-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay
Setup
LO-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
SDH/SONET Alarm Severity Setup
External (Environment) Alarm Setup
SD/SF Threshold Setup
Insert AIS Alarm Setup
Alarm Output Setup
Inhibit Port Alarm Setup

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


52
User’s Manual
O9400-R

5.18.2. System Alarm I Setup


System Alarm I is to set up the system alarm mask, relay and severity.

Table 5-2 System Alarm Setup I Descriptions


Alarm Type Description
Alm Cut Off Alarm for executing Alm Cut Off
Power Loss/Unequip Alarm for power module loss/unequip
Fan Fail Alarm for fan failure
Fan Module Uneqp Alarm for fan module unequip
RBC Uneqp Alarm for RBC unequip
Overheat Alarm for system overheating (over 75°C)
Ts Sync Loss Alarm for timing source sync. loss
Logon and Logoff Alarm for user logon/logoff
Optical port Uneqp Alarm for optical port SFP unequip
Card In
Alarm for plug-in cards or standby controller card
plug-in
Card Out Alarm for plug-in cards or controller card remove
Card Type Mismatch
Alarm for plug-in cards type not matching
registered model type for that slot*
Card Port Number Mismatch Alarm for port number of plug-in cards not
matching registered port number**
Card Fail Alarm for plug-in cards initialization failure
Card Registration Alarm for plug-in cards registration
* Example: If you register an E1 card but plug in a B155/622, the card type mismatch alarm will
show.
** Example: If you register a 63 port E1 card but plug in a 32 port E1 card, the port number
mismatch alarm will show.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


53
User’s Manual
O9400-R

5.18.3. System Alarm II Setup


This is to set up the System II Alarm.

Table 5-3 System Alarm Setup II Descriptions


Alarm Type Description
SNCP/UPSR Switch Alarm for SNCP/UPSR protection switch
MSP Switch Alarm for MSP protection switch
Trib Protection SYNC Alarm for tributary cards protection sync
Standby controller card Takeover Alarm for standby controller card
takeover
Standby Trib Takeover Alarm for standby trib takeover
controller card SYNC Alarm for two controller cards sync
SFP Tx Fail Alarm for SFP module transmit failure
SFP Rx Fail Alarm for SFP module receive failure
SFP Temperature Alarm for SFP module overheating

5.18.4. Line Alarm Mask/Relay Setup


This is to set up mask and relay for the Line alarm.

5.18.5. HO-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup


This is to set up mask and relay for the HO-Path/STS-Path alarm

5.18.6. LO-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup


This is to set up mask and relay for the LO-Path/VT-Path alarm

5.18.7. SDH/SONET Alarm Severity Setup


This is to set up SDH/SONET alarm severity.

5.18.8. External (Environment) Alarm Setup


This is to set up the alarm mask, relay, severity and message for each of the four external
alarms.

Table 5-4 External Alarm Descriptions


External Alarm Types
External Alarm1
External Alarm2
External Alarm3
External Alarm4

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


54
User’s Manual
O9400-R

5.18.9. SD/SF Threshold Setup


This is to set up the SD (signal degrade) and SF (signal failure) thresholds.

5.18.10. Insert AIS Alarm Setup


If AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) insertion is enabled and an alarm occurs, the O9400 will
automatically insert an AIS int
o the downstream traffic.Detailed setup instructions are given in Chapter 6.

5.18.11. Alarm Output Setup


The function called alarm output setup is used to control the Alarm Output Connector for two
purposes.

· One is by system, under Alarm Interface Secrion (3.2), there has a table definition of pin-
out for Alarm Output Connector which 4 ports for critical, major, minor, and informative
alarm status.
· One is by user, under VT-100 menu tree, user can set the 4 ports either Opens or Closes
and there have 63characters for customer to define the port info.

5.18.12. Inhibit Port Alarm Setup


The function allows the user to disable the alarm per port for XCU or B16 card.

Detailed setup instructions are given in Chapter 6.

5.19. File Transfer


5.19.1. Download Mainboard Firmware
This is used to download new version firmware to the mainboard. There are two firmware
banks in the O9400R. If you are currently using firmware stored in Bank 1 and download new
firmware and store it, that firmware will be stored in Bank 2. When you power-off your O9400R
device and then power it up again, it will run on the firmware in Bank 2. Detailed setup
instructions are given in Chapter 6.

5.19.2. Download Current Configuration


This is used to download the current configuration from a TFTP server. Detailed setup
instructions are given in Chapter 6.

5.19.3. Download Backup Configuration


This is used to download a backup configuration from a TFTP server. Detailed setup
instructions are given in Chapter 6.
Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.
55
User’s Manual
O9400-R

5.19.4. Upload Current Configuration from FLASH


This is used to upload the current configuration from the FLASH Memory to a TFTP server.
Detailed setup instructions are given in Chapter 6.

5.19.5. Upload Backup Configuration from FLASH


This is used to upload a backup configuration from FLASH memory to a TFTP server. Detailed
setup instructions are given in Chapter 6.

5.19.6. Change Firmware Boot Bank


There are two firmware banks. The user can specify which bank will be used upon boot up.
Detailed setup instructions are given in Chapter 6.

5.19.7. Copy Firmware to other Controller Card


Firmware can be copied from one controller card to another. Detailed setup instructions are
given in Chapter 6.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


56
User’s Manual
O9400-R

5.20. Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration


Whenever a configuration change is made you must store it. Detailed setup instructions are
given in Chapter 6.

5.21. Loopback/Diagnostic Setup


This is used to set up Loopback or diagnostic tests. Detailed setup instructions are given in
Chapter 6.

The near end loopbacks such as local loopback, line loopback, and payload loopback, are
activated by the O9400R. The loopbacks are at the near end facility. The following paragraph
describes each loopback in detail.

NOTES: Deactivate the near-end loopbacks from the terminal, depending on where it
was activated.

5.21.1. Local Loopback


Local loopback is illustrated in Figure below. The outgoing STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) signal is looped
back through the transceiver. All STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) signals are looped back to the receiver
path. This loopback test is activated by the Test command. This loopback test can be used with
the PRBS diagnostic test pattern to validate the local O9400's integrity.

5.21.2. Line Loopback


Line loopback is illustrated in Figure below. The incoming STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) line signal is
loopback to the outgoing STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) signal before the SDH/SONET transceiver framer.
This loopback is used to isolate the local equipment from a troubled STM-1/4 (OC-3/12)
transmission line. Line loopback test can be activated from the terminal.

5.21.3. Payload Loopback


Payload loopback is illustrated in figure below. The incoming signal is loopback to the outgoing
STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) signal after the SDH/SONET transceiver framer. This loopback is used to
isolate the local equipment from the troubled STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) transmission line. Payload
loopback test can be activated from the terminal.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


57
User’s Manual
O9400-R

O9400R

XCU
E1/T1
5 4

E3/T3
SDH/
7 6 3 SONET 2 1
XC/TSA Framer

B155/622

SDH/
10 9 SONET 8
Framer

1 XCU (controller) Line Loopback


2 XCU (controller) Local Loopback
3 XCU (controller) Payload Loopback
4 E1/T1 Local Loopoback
5 E1/T1 Line Loopback
6 E3/T3 Local Loopback
7 E3/T3 Line Loopback
8 B155/622 Payload Loopback
9 B155/622 Local Loopback
10 B155/622 Line Loopback

Figure 5-5 Loopback Block Diagram

NOTES: Line loopbacks are unsuitable for testing MSP protection.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


58
User’s Manual
O9400-R

5.22. Performance Setup


Performance Setup has two basic functions. One is to clear performance data. The other is to
enable or disable, specify the severity of, and set the trap threshold of various performance
monitoring points over a certain tributary.

Table 5-5 Performance Monitoring Parameters


SDH Parameters Description
RS-BIP(B1) Regenerator section BIP Error (B1)
MS-BIP(B2) Multiplex section BIP Error (B2)
MS-REI Multiplex section Remote Error
Indication
HP-BIP(B3) HO path BIP error (B3)
HP-REI HO path Remote Error Indication
LP-BIP(V5) LO path BIP Error (V5)
LP-REI(V5) LO path Remote Error Indication
(V5)
LP-BIP(B3) LO path BIP Error (B3)
LP-REI(B3) LO path Remote Error Indication
(B3)

SONET Description
Parameters
BIP-S(B1) Section BIP Error (B1)
BIP-L(B2) Line BIP Error (B2)
REI-L Line Remote Error Indication
BIP-P(B3) STS path BIP Error (B3)
REI-P STS path Remote Error Indication
BIP-V(V5) VT path BIP Error(V5)
REI-V(V5) VT path Remote Error Indication
(V5)

Detailed setup instructions are given in Chapter 6.

5.23. Tributary Card Registration


Detailed setup instructions are given in Chapter 6.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


59
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6. SYSTEM SETUP
This chapter provides detailed setup instructions. After connecting your VT-100 monitor to the
Loop device, your first setup steps should be as follows:

1. Log on and set up your password (see Section 6.1 Logon and Password Setup)
2. Set your system to SDH or SONET (see Section 6.11 System Mode Setup)

After that you can proceed as needs dictate. Please note that plug-in cards must be registered
with the O9400R device or you will not be able to access their detailed menu screens.

6.1. Logon and Password Setup


When you initially power up the O9400R device it will go through a series of self-tests and the
following self-test screen will briefly appear on your VT-100 monitor before the Controller Menu
screen appears.

O.K.
Init SPI .....O.K.
Init IPC(fcc2) .....O.K.
Init IRC(scc4) .....O.K.
Init P2 hdlc(scc1) .....O.K.
Init P1 hdlc(scc3) .....O.K.
Init timer .....O.K.
Init system configuration...3...2...1...
Check and Load Configuration.....load previous
Init TBS2488 .....O.K.
Init ADM622 .....O.K.
XCU1 starting(13).....

6.1.1. Logon
The Controller Menu for the O9400R is shown below. Press O to log on. You will be asked for
a user name and a password. The default user names are OPERATOR, OPERATOR1,
OPERATOR2, OPERATOR3 and ADMIN. The default password is LOOP.

NOTES: The device name will appear in the top left-hand corner of the menu screen as
1. O9400R-CC4-CHA or O9400R-CC4-CHAA, depending on which Loop device
you are using.
Default user names and default password must be typed in using upper case
2.
letters.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


60
User’s Manual
O9400-R

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Controller Menu === 16:28:54 05/15/2014

Serial Number : 000516 Device Name : O9400R


Hardware Version: E Start Time : 17:45:23 05/07/2014
Software Version: V3.05.01 (0005) Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
FPGA Version : V1 XCU Protection: Redundant Ready
[DISPLAY] [SETUP]

[LOG] [MISC]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>


If you log in as OPERATOR, OPERATOR1, OPERATOR2 or OPERATOR3, type in the password and then
press the Enter key, the following half-menu screen will appear. It allows access to display screens only and
does not allow the setup of configurations.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Controller Menu === 11:30:22 04/25/2007

Serial Number : 010523 Device Name : O9400R


Hardware Version: D Start Time : 11:26:28 04/25/2010
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/19/2007 Connect Port : SUPV_PORT
FPGA Version : V1 XCU Protection: Redundant Ready
[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> System Config Display
D -> SDH/SONET Config Display
I -> System Information
Q -> Alarm Queue
B -> Currently-Active Alarm Summary
A -> Current Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance
T -> System Log
E -> Diagnostics Display

[LOG] [MISC]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Trib Unit

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


61
User’s Manual
O9400-R

If you log in as ADMIN, type in the password and then press the Enter key, the following full-menu screen will
appear. It allows access to both display and setup screens.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Controller Menu === 11:30:22 04/25/2007

Serial Number : 010523 Device Name : O9400R


Hardware Version: D Start Time : 11:26:28 04/25/2010
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/19/2007 Connect Port : SUPV_PORT
FPGA Version : V1 XCU Protection: Redundant Ready

[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> System Config Display S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Display H -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
I -> System Information M -> Alarm Setup
Q -> Alarm Queue L -> File Transfer
B -> Currently-Active Alarm Summary V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
A -> Current Alarm Status G -> Loopback/Diagnostics Setup
P -> SDH/SONET Performance R -> Performance Setup/Clear
T -> System Log N -> Unit Registration
E -> Diagnostics Display

[LOG] [MISC]
F -> Log Off Y -> Alarm Cut Off
O -> Log On Z -> Reset
U -> Choose a Trib Unit X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

NOTES: You can see Controller Card Protection status on the screen; see below
table for status explanation.

Table 6-1 Description for Controller Card protection status


XCU Protection: Description
Version Mismatch The versions for 2 controller cards do not match,
please check.
No Redundant Card There is only 1 controller card, please insert the
other one.
Wait to Sync Controller cards are waiting to be synced, please
wait.
During Sync Controller cards are now communicating, please
wait.
Redundant Ready The system is ready to use.

6.1.2. Change a Password

The full menu path for changing a password is as follows:


O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
C > Password Setup

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


62
User’s Manual
O9400-R

To change a password, press S from the Controller Menu.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Controller Menu === 12:15:20 08/09/2007

Serial Number : 010525 Device Name : O9400R


Hardware Version: D Start Time : 12:09:32 08/09/2007
Software Version: V1.01.01 07/24/2007 Connect Port : SUPV_PORT
FPGA Version : V1 XCU Protection: Redundant Ready
[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> System Config Display S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Display H -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
I -> System Information M -> Alarm Setup
Q -> Alarm Queue L -> File Transfer
B -> Currently-Active Alarm Summary V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
A -> Current Alarm Status G -> Loopback/Diagnostics Setup
P -> SDH/SONET Performance R -> Performance Setup/Clear
T -> System Log N -> Unit Registration
E -> Diagnostics Display

[LOG] [MISC]
F -> Log Off Y -> Alarm Cut Off
O -> Log On Z -> Reset
U -> Choose a Trib Unit X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The System Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press C.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === System Configuration Setup === 12:17:32 08/09/2007

A -> System Setup


B -> SNMP Setup
C -> Password Setup
D -> Timing Source
E -> Customer Information Setup
F -> SNTP Setup
G -> DHCP Relay Setup
H -> Bridge and Router Setup
I -> Hand-waving LED setup
J -> SSH Setup
K -> M13 Setup
L -> RADIUS Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


63
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The Password Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the asterisk to either
Operator or Administrator. Press the Enter key.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Password Setup === 12:19:01 08/09/2007

<< ARROW LEFT/RIGHT: Select Password; Enter: Accept to change; ESC: Exit. >>
Select : Operator *Administrator Operator1 Operator2 Operator3

Type in your old password. Press the Enter key.

Type in your new password. Press the Enter key. Key it in again to confirm it. Press the Enter
key.

NOTES: 1. If you did not have a password before, type in the default password, LOOP, in
upper case
Your password can be alphabetic, numeric or a combination of both.
Alphabetic characters can be typed in as upper case or lower case (eg.
2. Jb2rcL3). The password is case sensitive. Minimum password size is
one (1) character. Maximum password size is 10 characters. Make sure you
write your password down somewhere in case you forget it.

A prompt will ask if you wish to save your new password. Press Y for Yes, then press the
Enter key. This procedure is complete. Press the Esc key twice to return to the Controller
Menu.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Password Setup === 12:46:18 08/09/2007


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort

<< ARROW LEFT/RIGHT: Select Password; Enter: Accept to change; ESC: Exit. >>
Select : Operator *Administrator Operator1 Operator2 Operator3

Old Password : XXXX


New Password : XXXX
Confirm Password: XXXX

>> Save new password (Y/N)?

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


64
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.2. System Setup


The full menu path for System Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
A > System Setup

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.2.1. Setup Screen Access


To setup the System, press S from the Controller Menu.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Controller Menu === 13:22:54 08/09/2007

Serial Number : 010525 Device Name : O9400R


Hardware Version: D Start Time : 12:41:25 08/09/2007
Software Version: V1.01.01 07/24/2007 Connect Port : SUPV_PORT
FPGA Version : V1 XCU Protection: Redundant Ready
[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> System Config Display S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Display H -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
I -> System Information M -> Alarm Setup
Q -> Alarm Queue L -> File Transfer
B -> Currently-Active Alarm Summary V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
A -> Current Alarm Status G -> Loopback/Diagnostics Setup
P -> SDH/SONET Performance R -> Performance Setup/Clear
T -> System Log N -> Unit Registration
E -> Diagnostics Display

[LOG] [MISC]
F -> Log Off Y -> Alarm Cut Off
O -> Log On Z -> Reset
U -> Choose a Trib Unit X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The System Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press A.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === System Configuration Setup === 13:23:56 08/09/2007

A -> System Setup


B -> SNMP Setup
C -> Password Setup
D -> Timing Source
E -> Customer Information Setup
F -> SNTP Setup
G -> DHCP Relay Setup
H -> Bridge and Router Setup
I -> Hand-waving LED setup
J -> SSH Setup
K -> M13 Setup
L -> RADIUS Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


65
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.2.2. System Setup Procedure

The System Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to each field.

Type in the Time and Date.

Time format is hr (0-24):min.(0-60):sec.(0-60).

Date format is month (1-12):day(1-31):year(4 digits)

NOTES: Power Loss Time is for your information only. It will appear on the screen if
for some reason there was an interruption in power or the user turned the
device off and then on again.

Refer to the table below and then scroll or type in your settings as required.

Table 6-2 SystemSetup Setting Options


Field Setting Options Default Setting Note
Time/Date Type in
IP Address 0.0.0.0 “
Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 “
Gateway IP 0.0.0.0 “
Routing Protocol Off, RIP1, RIP 2 Off More info refer to :
White paper: DCN
Design Philosophy for
Loop SDH Products
Ethernet Port Enable, Disable Disable
Telnet Lockout Enable, Disable Disable
Telnet Timeout 300 to 3600 600
Password Check Enable, Disable Enable
Console Timeout 300 to 3600 600
Baud Rate 2400, 4800, 9600, 9600
19200, 38400, 57600
Data Length 7-bits, 8-bits 8-bits
Stop Bit 1-bit, 2-bits 1-bit
Parity NONE, EVEN, ODD NONE

After scrolling in your settings press the Enter key. A prompt will ask if you want to change the
configuration. Press Y for yes.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === System Setup === 11:23:41 12/25/2012


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: hh:mm:ss mm/dd/yyyy, BACKSPACE to edit
[System]
Time/Date : 11:23:41 12/25/2012 Power Loss Time: 13:52:29 12/13/2012
IP Address : 192.168.056.006
Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.000
Gateway IP : 192.168.056.254 Routing Protocol : OFF

Ethernet Port : ENABLE


Telnet Lockout : DISABLE Telnet Timeout : 0600 Seconds
Password Check : DISABLE Console Timeout: 3600 Seconds

[CONSOLE port]
Baud Rate : 9600
Data Length : 8-Bits
Stop Bit : 1-Bit
Parity : NONE

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


66
User’s Manual
O9400-R

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

You will be returned to the System Configuration Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to
the Controller Menu.

The menu path for storing a configuration:


V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

Press V to store the configuration.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Controller Menu === 13:49:34 08/09/2007

Serial Number : 010525 Device Name : O9400R


Hardware Version: D Start Time : 12:41:25 08/09/2007
Software Version: V1.01.01 07/24/2007 Connect Port : SUPV_PORT
FPGA Version : V1 XCU Protection: Redundant Ready
[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> System Config Display S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Display H -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
I -> System Information M -> Alarm Setup
Q -> Alarm Queue L -> File Transfer
B -> Currently-Active Alarm Summary V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
A -> Current Alarm Status G -> Loopback/Diagnostics Setup
P -> SDH/SONET Performance R -> Performance Setup/Clear
T -> System Log N -> Unit Registration
E -> Diagnostics Display

[LOG] [MISC]
F -> Log Off Y -> Alarm Cut Off
O -> Log On Z -> Reset
U -> Choose a Trib Unit X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move your cursor
to STORE. Press the Enter key. A prompt will ask if you wish to store this configuration. Press
Y for yes.

O9400R-CC4-CHA ===Store/Retrieve Configuration=== 13:50:04 08/09/2007

>> Select ? *STORE RETRIEVE


>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]

A prompt will ask you to type in your password. After keying it in press the Enter key.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA ===S tor e/R etri eve Co nfig ura tio n=== 13 :50: 04 08/ 09/2 007

>> S ele ct ? *ST ORE R ETR IEVE


==>> En ter pas swo rd : XX XX

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


67
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The word Saving will temporarily appear. When it disappears, press the Esc key to return to
the Controller Menu. This procedure is complete.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA = ==St ore /Re trie ve Con figu rat ion === 13: 53:0 3 0 8/0 9/20 07

>> S ele ct ? *ST ORE R ETR IEVE


=== > S avi ng.. ... ..

6.3. SNMP Setup


The full menu path for SNMP Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Configuration Setup
B > SNMP Setup
A > SNMP System Setup or B > V1 Community & Trap Setup

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.3.1. Setup Screen Access


To setup SNMP, press S from the Controller Menu.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Controller Menu === 16:08:12 08/10/2007

Serial Number : 010525 Device Name : O9400R


Hardware Version: D Start Time : 10:04:31 08/10/2007
Software Version: V1.01.01 07/24/2007 Connect Port : SUPV_PORT
FPGA Version : V1 XCU Protection: Redundant Ready
[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> System Config Display S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Display H -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
I -> System Information M -> Alarm Setup
Q -> Alarm Queue L -> File Transfer
B -> Currently-Active Alarm Summary V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
A -> Current Alarm Status G -> Loopback/Diagnostics Setup
P -> SDH/SONET Performance R -> Performance Setup/Clear
T -> System Log N -> Unit Registration
E -> Diagnostics Display

[LOG] [MISC]
F -> Log Off Y -> Alarm Cut Off
O -> Log On Z -> Reset
U -> Choose a Trib Unit X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The System Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press B.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


68
User’s Manual
O9400-R

O9400R-CC4-CHA === System Configuration Setup === 16:08:04 08/10/2007

A -> System Setup


B -> SNMP Setup
C -> Password Setup
D -> Timing Source
E -> Customer Information Setup
F -> SNTP Setup
G -> DHCP Relay Setup
H -> Bridge and Router Setup
I -> Hand-waving LED setup
J -> SSH Setup
K -> M13 Setup
L -> RADIUS Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

The SNMP Setup screen menu will appear. See instructions below.

6.3.2. SNMP System Setup

6.3.2.1. SNMP System Setup

Press A from the SNMP Setup menu.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === SNMP Setup === 16:12:55 08/10/2007

A -> SNMP System Setup


B -> V1 Community & Trap Setup
C -> V3 User-Base Security Model Setup
D -> V3 View-Base Access Control Model Setup1
E -> V3 View-Base Access Control Model Setup2
F -> V3 Target & Notify Setup
G -> Load default SNMPV3 settings

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

The SNMP System Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move your cursor to the
various fields. Type in the device name, location info and contact info. Press the Enter key.
Table 6-3 SNMP System Setting Options
Field Setting Default Notes
Options Setting
Device Name User to type in info. Device name can be up
to 25 characters in length.
System User to type in info. Four rows available for
Location: information. Each row will hold up to 62 characters
System User to type in info. Four rows available for
Contact information. Each row will hold up to 62 characters
SNMP model V1 only, V1 only
V3 only,
V1+V3

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


69
User’s Manual
O9400-R

O9400R-CC4-CHA === SNMP System Setup === 16:26:03 08/10/2007


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort

Device Name : O9400R______________

System Location: 6F, No.8 Hsin Ann Rd.


Science-Based Industrial Park
Hsinchu, 30078Taiwan

System Contact : Name:FAE Tel:+886-3-5787696 Fax:+886-3-5787695


E-mail:FAE@loop.com.tw

SNMP model : V1 only

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you wish to change the Configuration. Press Y for yes.

>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

You will be returned to the SNMP Setup menu. Press the Esc key twice to return to the
Controller Menu. You must now store the new configuration. The menu path for storing a
configuration is as follows:
V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

6.3.2.2. V1 Community & Trap Setup


Press B from the SNMP Setup menu. The VI Community & Trap Setup screen will appear.

Table 6-4 V1 Community & Trap Setting Options


Field Setting Default Notes
Options Setting
Community private User to type in info. Max.14 characters.
(Set) See note below table re: Case Sensitivity
Community public User to type in info. Max.14 characters.
(Get) See note below table re: Case Sensitivity
Trap IP 1 0.0.0.0 Type in IP Trap address
Trap IP 2 0.0.0.0 Type in IP Trap address
Trap IP 3 0.0.0.0 Type in IP Trap address
Trap IP 4 0.0.0.0 Type in IP Trap address

[Trap Control]
Alarm Trap ENABLE, ENABLE
DISABLE
LED Trap ENABLE, ENABLE
DISABLE
Severity ENABLE, ENABLE
Change DISABLE
Trap Delay 0~60 sec 0 0=No delay

NOTES: Case sensitivity exists for Community field settings. If you are using Castle
Rock SNMPc in conjunction with the O9400R device, you must make sure
that if the community name is written in the lower case letters on your SNMPc
screen setup, it must also be in lower case letters on the O9400R screen
setup. The cases (either lower or upper) must match.
Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.
70
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Use the arrow keys to move your cursor to the various fields. Type or scroll in your settings.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === V1 Community & Trap Setup === 15:19:11

05/11/2017
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort

Community(Set) : public________ Community(Get) : public

[Trap Server]
Trap IP 1 : 192.168.056.001 Community : public
Trap IP 2 : 192.168.000.060 Community : public
Trap IP 3 : 000.000.000.000 Community : public
Trap IP 4 : 000.000.000.000 Community : public

[Trap Control]
Alarm Trap : ENABLE LED Trap : ENABLE
Severity Change: ENABLE

Trap Delay : 00 (seconds)

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Press the Enter key. A prompt will ask if you wish to change the Configuration. Press Y for
yes.

>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

You will be returned to the SNMP Setup menu. Press the Esc key twice to return to the
Controller Menu. You must now store the new configuration. The menu path for storing a
configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

6.3.2.3. V3 User-Base Security Model Setup


Press C from the SNMP Setup menu. The SNMP Setup (USM) screen will appear. Type or
scroll in your settings.
O9400R-CC4-CHA === SNMP Setup (USM) === 14:16:43 06/22/2009

[My Engine] . . .
Engine ID : 00000337000000000000002B
Boots : 10
Total User: 2

[User 01] . . .
Engine ID : 00000337000000000000002B
User Name : loopmd5
Auth Protocol: MD5
Auth Key : 12C4AEE550B71E7F7FF53C5235E772F8
Priv Protocol: DES
Priv Key : 12C4AEE550B71E7F7FF53C5235E772F8
Status : Active
Storage : NonVolatile

<< ESC=>return to previous menu, LEFT/RIGHT=>prev/next user, F=>find user >>


<< E=>edit engine, ENTER=>edit user, C=>clone user, A=>add user, D=>delete >>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


71
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Press the Enter key. A prompt will ask if you wish to change the Configuration. Press Y for
yes.

>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

You will be returned to the SNMP Setup menu. Press the Esc key twice to return to the
Controller Menu. You must now store the new configuration. The menu path for storing a
configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


72
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.3.2.4. V3 View-Base Access Control Model Setup1


Press D from the SNMP Setup menu. The SNMP Setup (VACM) screen will appear. Type or
scroll in your settings.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === SNMP Setup (VACM) === 14:18:12 06/22/2009

[Context] : (empty)

[Security to Group] 1/2


Security Model: V3(USM)
Security Name : loopmd5
Group Name : initial
Status : Active
Storage : NonVolatile

<< ESC=>return to menu, UP/DOWN=>context/group, LEFT/RIGHT=>prev/next >>


<< F=>find, ENTER=>edit, A=>add, D=>delete >>

Press the Enter key. A prompt will ask if you wish to change the Configuration. Press Y for
yes.

>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

You will be returned to the SNMP Setup menu. Press the Esc key twice to return to the
Controller Menu. You must now store the new configuration. The menu path for storing a
configuration:
V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

6.3.2.5. V3 View-Base Access Control Model Setup2

Press E from the SNMP Setup menu. The SNMP Setup (VACM) screen will appear. Type or
scroll in your settings.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === SNMP Setup (VACM) === 14:19:31 06/22/2009

[Access] 1/2
Group Name : initial
Security Model : V3(USM)
Security Level : NoAuthNoPriv
Context Prefix : (reserved)
Context Match : (reserved)
Read View Name : one
Write View Name :
Notify View Name: (reserved)
Status : Active
Storage : NonVolatile

[View Family] 1/3


View Name : one
Sub-tree : 1.3.6.1.6.3
Mask : (reserved)
Type : include
Status : Active
Storage : NonVolatile

<< ESC=>return to previous menu, UP/DOWN=>Access/View, LEFT/RIGHT=>prev/next >>


<< ENTER=>edit, A=>add, D=>delete >>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


73
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Press the Enter key. A prompt will ask if you wish to change the Configuration. Press Y for
yes.

>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

You will be returned to the SNMP Setup menu. Press the Esc key twice to return to the
Controller Menu. You must now store the new configuration. The menu path for storing a
configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

6.3.2.6. V3 Target & Notify Setup


Press F from the SNMP Setup menu. The SNMP (Target & Notify) screen will appear. Type or
scroll in your settings.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === SNMP Setup (Target & Notify) === 14:20:45 06/22/2009

[Target] 1/1
Target Name: mytarget
Domain : UDP
IP Address : 192.168.1.254 Notify Port: 162
Tag : group1
Timeout : 3 Retry : 0
Parameter : AuthNoPriv-one
Status : Active
[Parameter] 1/1
Param Name : AuthNoPriv-one
MP Model : V3
Sec Model : V3
Sec Level : AuthNoPriv
Sec Name : loopmd5
Status : Active
[Notify] 1/1
Name : group1
Tag : group1
Type : Trap
Status : Active
<< ESC=>return to menu, UP/DOWN=>Target/Parameter/Notify, LEFT/RIGHT=>prev/next
<< ENTER=>edit, A=>add, D=>delete >>
Press the Enter key. A prompt will ask if you wish to change the Configuration. Press Y for
yes.

>> C han ge c onf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

You will be returned to the SNMP Setup menu. Press the Esc key twice to return to the
Controller Menu. You must now store the new configuration. The menu path for storing a
configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


74
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.3.2.7. Load default SNMPV3 settings


Press G from the SNMP Setup menu. The load default SNMPv3 settings screen will appear.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Load default SNMPV3 settings === 11:03:06 11/13/2014

>> Load default SNMPV3 settings - are you sure ? [Y/N]


A prompt will ask if you wish to load the default SNMPv3 settings. Press Y for yes.

You will be returned to the SNMP Setup menu. Press the Esc key twice to return to the
Controller Menu. You must now store the new configuration. The menu path for storing a
configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

6.4. Timing Source Setup


The full menu path for Timing Source Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
D > Timing Source Setup

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.4.1. Setup Screen Access


To setup the Timing Source, press S from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA == = C ontr oll er Menu == = 14: 03:2 7 0 8/0 9/20 07

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 12: 41:2 5 0 8/0 9/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S -> Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H - > SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L - > Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


75
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The System Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press D.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA == = S yst em C onf igu rati on Set up = == 1 4:29 :53 06 /08/ 201 6

A -> Sys tem Se tup


B -> SNM P S etu p
C -> Pas swo rd Setu p
D -> Tim ing So urce
E -> Cus tom er Info rma tio n Se tup
F -> SNT P S etu p
G -> DHC P R ela y Se tup
H -> Bri dge an d Ro ute r S etup
I -> Han d- w avi ng L ED Set up
J -> SSH Se tup
K -> M13 Se tup
L -> RAD IUS Se tup

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

The Timing Source screen will appear.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA == = Ti min g S ourc e = == 1 4:31 :25 06 /08/ 201 6

A -> Ti ming So urc e


B -> SS M Co nve rsi on T abl e S etup

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

6.4.2. Timing Source Setup Procedure


Presss A, the Timing Source Setup screen will appear. Use the tab key to scroll in your settings.
Available choices are: Strict (Non-revertive), Strict (Revertive) and SSM. Press the Enter key.

For clock mode


NOTES: Strict (Non-revertive) means that if a clock source fails, the next clock source
in line will be used. When the original clock source functions again, the device
will not revert back to that clock source.

Strict (Revertive) means that if a clock source fails, the next clock source in
line will be used. When the original clock source functions again, the device
will revert back to that clock source.

SSM stands for Synchronous Status Message. Basically, SSM monitors the
clock sources and automatically selects the best one.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


76
User’s Manual
O9400-R

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Timing Source === 15:52:34 08/09/2007


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

Clock Mode : Strict(Non-revertive)

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu

Below are the options for clock mode configuration:

Field Setting Options Default


Clock Mode Strict(Revertive), Strict (Non-revertive)
Strict (Non-revertive),
SSM

Screen below shown Timing Source Setup in Clock Mode is Strict (Non-revertive)
O9400R-CC4-CHA === Timing Source === 15:11:07 08/22/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

Clock Mode : Strict(Non-revertive)

[Source] [Quality] [SSM Message]


Priority 1st : Null
Priority 2nd : Null
Priority 3rd : Null
Priority 4th : Internal Static

Current Clock : 4th

External Clock-1 External Clock-2


----------------- -----------------
Interface : E1-CRC Interface : E1-CRC
Carry Bit : Sa4 Carry Bit : Sa4
Impedance : 120ohm Impedance : 120ohm

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Below is the External Clock 1 and Clock 2 Configuration Table for Timing Source under Strict
(Revertive/ Non-revertive) and SSM Condition.

An expanded setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move your cursor to each field.
Then use the Tab key to scroll in the settings.

NOTES: 1. Some settings must be typed in.


2. Only E1-CRC & E1-FAS can choose Carry Bit and Impedance.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


77
User’s Manual
O9400-R

External Clock-1, Interface Carry Bit Impedance


2 E1 T1 E1 T1 E1 T1
Default E1-CRC T1-ESF Sa4 N/A 120ohm N/A
Setting Options E1- T1- Sa4 to 75ohm,
CRC, ESF , Sa8 120ohm
E1- T1-D4
FAS,
2MHz
st nd
Priority 1 , 2 , Source Quality SSM Message
rd
3
Default Null N/A N/A
Setting Options Null N/A N/A
XCU1-P1, P2 Static 0 to 9, A to F
XCU2-P1, P2 Autonote
Exte-1
Exte-2
Trib-1
Trib-2
Trib-3
Trib-4

NOTES: Only the Tributary1 to 4 is B155/622card, the SSM messaging is supported.


1. Otherwise, the Tributary 1 to 4 is E1/T1 card and E3/T3 card, the clock quality
is fixed in Static.
Auto option in Quality
· Only available in SSM mode when source is XCU1-P1/P2, XCU2-
P1/P2, Exte-1. Exte-2 or, B155/622 card in trib-1 to trib-4.
2.
· In Auto option, the SSM message can’t be assigned.
Exception: External clock 1 or 2 setting is in T1-D4 or 2 MHz and the clock
mode is in SSM mode, the quality is set to Static only.
3. SSM message: for more info, please refer to next page of Table of SSM
description in SDH and in SONET.

The priority 4th source setting is Internal or Null.

Priority 4th Source Quality SSM Message


Default Internal Static N/A
Setting Options Null N/A N/A

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


78
User’s Manual
O9400-R

To check the current setting, go to Main Menu: C->System Config Display C->Timing Source

Screen below shows SSM Mode of Timing Source Display in SONET

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Timing Source === 20:37:29 12/26/2011

Clock Mode : SSM

[Source] [Rx S1] [Tx S1] [Valid]


Priority 1st : Exte-1 00(STU) 0f(DUS) Yes
Priority 2nd : Null -- -- No
Priority 3rd : Null -- -- No
Priority 4th : Internal 0a(ST3) 00(STU) Yes

Current Clock : 1st


Operation State : Sync.

External Clock-1 External Clock-2


----------------- -----------------
Interface : T1-ESF Interface : T1-ESF
Carry Bit : ---- Carry Bit : ----
Impedance : ---- Impedance : ----

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

The display info on the above sample screen:

· Clock Mode: Current clock mode is SSM.


· Priority 1st: First priority clock source is from External Clock 1.
· RX S1=00(STU) Tx S1=0f(DUS): shows Receiver/transceiver quality level. (see the
SONET quality level table below for detail)
· Valid: it shows availability.
· Current Clock: 1st: it means the priority 1st clock source is used.
· Operation State: it comes with three states: Sync, Hold-over, and Free run. This
Operation State only appears in SSM mode.

Table of SSM description in SONET


SONET Synchronization Abb. Quality Level S1 Bits
Quality Level Description (b5-b8)
Synchronized-Traceability STU 2 0000
Unknown
Stratum 1 Traceable PRS 1 0001
Stratum 2 Traceable ST2 3 0111
Transit Node Clock TNC 4 0100
Traceable
Stratum 3E Traceable ST3E 5 1101
Stratum 3 Traceable ST3 6 1010
SONET Minimum Clock SMC 7 1100
Traceable
Provisionable by the PNO User Assignable 1110
Network Operator
Don’t Use for DUS 9 1111
Synchronization
Reserved RES 1011

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


79
User’s Manual
O9400-R

· Screen below shows SSM Mode of Timing Source Display in SDH Set priority 1st:
Source is XCU1(W)-P1, Quality is Auto
· Set priority 2nd: Source is XCU1(W)-P2, Quality is Auto

Screen below shows SSM Mode of Timing Source Display in SDH

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Timing Source === 11:45:30 12/27/2011

Clock Mode : SSM

[Source] [Rx S1] [Tx S1] [Valid]


Priority 1st : Exte-2 00 0b No
Priority 2nd : XCU2(E) - P1 0f 0b No
Priority 3rd : Trib-1 - P2 00 0b No
Priority 4th : Internal 0b 0f Yes

Current Clock : 4th


Operation State : Free-Run

External Clock-1 External Clock-2


----------------- -----------------
Interface : E1-CRC Interface : E1-CRC
Carry Bit : Sa4 Carry Bit : Sa4
Impedance : 120ohm Impedance : 120ohm

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


80
User’s Manual
O9400-R

All the display info are same as SONET screen except the info shown in Rx S1 and Tx S1 of
SDH.

Table of SSM description in SDH


SDH Synchronization Quality Level S an1, S an2, S an3, S an4
Quality Level Description n=4, 5, 3, 7, or 8
depending on operator selection
Quality unknown (existing 0 0000
sync. network)
Reserved 1 0001
Rec. G.811 (Traceable to 0 0010
PRS)
Reserved 3 0011
SSU-A (Traceable to SSU 4 0100
type A, see G.812)
Reserved 5 0101
Reserved 6 0110
Reserved 7 0111
SSU-B (Traceable to SSU 8 1000
type B, see G.812)
Reserved 9 1001
Reserved A 1010
Synchronous Equipment B 1011
Timing Source (SETS)
Reserved C 1100
Reserved D 1101
Reserved E 1110
Do not use for F 1111
synchronization

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


81
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The SSM in SONET configuration sample in Normal Operation


NOTES: Below XCU indicates the controller card. Since the print on the card shown
XCU, so the name is kept.

Exte-1

O9400 #1
XCU1- XCU1-
P1 P2

XCU1- XCU1-
P1 P2

O9400 #2 O9400 #3
XCU1- XCU1-
P2 P1

Physical configuration
· O9400#1 XCU1-P1 link to O9400#2 XCU1-P1
· O9400#2 XCU1-P2 link to O9400#3 XCU1-P1
· O9400#3 XCU1-P2 link to O9400#1 XCU1-P2

Setup Configuration
Go to Timing Source Setup and set the Clock Mode in SSM for all three O9400R
1 O9400#1
· Set priority 1st: Source is Exte-1, Quality is Auto

Setup Screen of O9400R#1

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Timing Source === 20:34:01 12/26/2011


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

Clock Mode : SSM

[Source] [Quality] [SSM Message]


Priority 1st : Exte-1 Auto
Priority 2nd : Null
Priority 3rd : Null
Priority 4th : Internal Static

Current Clock : 1st

External Clock-1 External Clock-2


----------------- -----------------
Interface : T1-ESF Interface : T1-ESF
Carry Bit : ---- Carry Bit : ----
Impedance : ---- Impedance : ----

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>


Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.
82
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


83
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Display Screen of O9400R #1

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Timing Source === 20:37:29 12/26/2011

Clock Mode : SSM

[Source] [Rx S1] [Tx S1] [Valid]


Priority 1st : Exte-1 00(STU) 0f(DUS) Yes
Priority 2nd : Null -- -- No
Priority 3rd : Null -- -- No
Priority 4th : Internal 0a(ST3) 00(STU) Yes

Current Clock : 1st


Operation State : Sync.

External Clock-1 External Clock-2


----------------- -----------------
Interface : T1-ESF Interface : T1-ESF
Carry Bit : ---- Carry Bit : ----
Impedance : ---- Impedance : ----

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

2 O9400#2
· Set priority 1st: Source is XCU1(W)-P1, Quality is Auto
· Set priority 2nd: Source is XCU1(W)-P2, Quality is Auto

Setup Screen of O9400R#2


O9400R-CC4-CHA === Timing Source === 19:40:02
12/26/2011
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

Clock Mode : SSM

[Source] [Quality] [SSM Message]


Priority 1st : XCU1(W) - P1 Auto
Priority 2nd : XCU1(W) - P2 Auto
Priority 3rd : Null
Priority 4th : Internal Static

Current Clock : 1st

Display Screen of O9400R#2


O9400R-CC4-CHA === Timing Source === 19:43:41 12/26/2011

Clock Mode : SSM

[Source] [Rx S1] [Tx S1] [Valid]


Priority 1st : XCU1(W) - P1 00(STU) 0f(DUS) Yes
Priority 2nd : XCU1(W) - P2 0f(DUS) 00(STU) Yes
Priority 3rd : Null -- -- No
Priority 4th : Internal 0a(ST3) 00(STU) Yes

Current Clock : 1st


Operation State : Sync.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


84
User’s Manual
O9400-R

3 O9400#3
· Set priority 1st: Source is XCU1(W)-P1, Quality is Auto
· Set priority 2nd: Source is XCU1(W)-P2, Quality is Auto

Setup Screen of O9400R#3

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Timing Source === 20:44:15 12/26/2011


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

Clock Mode : SSM

[Source] [Quality] [SSM Message]


Priority 1st : XCU1(W) - P1 Auto
Priority 2nd : XCU1(W) - P2 Auto
Priority 3rd : Null
Priority 4th : Internal Static

Current Clock : 1st

Display Screen of O9400R#3

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Timing Source === 20:46:03


12/26/2011

Clock Mode : SSM

[Source] [Rx S1] [Tx S1] [Valid]


Priority 1st : XCU1(W) - P1 00(STU) 0f(DUS) Yes
Priority 2nd : XCU1(W) - P2 0f(DUS) 00(STU) No
Priority 3rd : Null -- -- No
Priority 4th : Internal 0a(ST3) 00(STU) Yes

Current Clock : 1st


Operation State : Sync.

When Line Break between O9400R#1 and O9400R #2.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


85
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Exte-1

O9400 #1
XCU1- XCU1-
P1 P2

XCU1- XCU1-
P1 P2

O9400 #2 O9400 #3
XCU1- XCU1-
P2 P1

The SSM function will automatically switch from 1st to 2nd priority clock source in O9400R#2 and
O9400R #3. All the setup remains unchanged except the display in O9400R#2 and #3 screens.

Display Screen of O9400R#2

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Timing Source === 19:54:04 12/26/2011

Clock Mode : SSM

[Source] [Rx S1] [Tx S1] [Valid]


Priority 1st : XCU1(W) - P1 0f(DUS) 00(STU) No
Priority 2nd : XCU1(W) - P2 00(STU) 0f(DUS) Yes
Priority 3rd : Null -- -- No
Priority 4th : Internal 0a(ST3) 00(STU) Yes

Current Clock : 2nd


Operation State : Sync.

Display Screen of O9400R#3

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Timing Source === 20:56:00 12/26/2011

Clock Mode : SSM

[Source] [Rx S1] [Tx S1] [Valid]


Priority 1st : XCU1(W) - P1 0f(DUS) 00(STU) Yes
Priority 2nd : XCU1(W) - P2 00(STU) 0f(DUS) Yes
Priority 3rd : Null -- -- No
Priority 4th : Internal 0a(ST3) 00(STU) Yes

Current Clock : 2nd


Operation State : Sync.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


86
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.4.3. SSM Conversion Table Setup Procedure


Presss B, the SSM Conversion Table Setup screen will appear. Key or scroll in your settings.
Press the Enter key.

The SSM Conversion table is used to convert SSM messages among different standards- SDH,
SONET, E1 and T1.

1. The SSM message corresponding to lower Quality Level is with higher priority.
2. Those items shown (N/A) are not defined in standards and must be configured by users. The
default values of those undefined items are values one level below them

9400R-CC4-CHA === SSM Conversion Table Setup === 14:39:14 06/08/2016


Please Input binary number (0~1), BACKSPACE to edit

Quality Level SDH&E1 SSM SONET SSM DS1 SSM


1 PRS 0010 0001 00000100
2 STU 0000 0000 00001000
3 ST2 0110(N/A) 0111 00001100
4 TNC/G812T 0100 0100 01111000
5 ST3E/G812L 1000 1101 01111100
6 ST3 1001(N/A) 1010 00010000
7 SMC/SETS 1011 1100 00100010
8 ST4 1110(N/A) 1110(N/A) 00101000
9 DUS 1111 1111 00110000

DS1 SSM codeword transmit direction: rightmost bit first.

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

The ESF codeword is by default transmitted from the leftmost bit. User may change ti to
transmit from
the rightmost bit first by enable the option.

Field Setting Options Default


DS1 SSM codeword transmit Rightmost,leftmo rightmost
direction st

A prompt will ask if you wish to change the Configuration. Press Y for yes.
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


87
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.5. Customer Information Setup


This function provides a text field for user-defined information related to a port on the XCU-4
card.

The full menu path for Customer Information Setup is as follows:


O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
E > Customer Information Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.5.1. Setup Screen Access


To setup Customer Information, press S from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA = == Cont rol ler Men u = == 14 :03: 27 08/ 09/2 007

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 12: 41:2 5 0 8/0 9/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S -> Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H - > SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L - > Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


88
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The System Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press E.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA = == Sys tem Con fig urat ion Se tup === 14:0 4:0 7 0 8/09 /20 07

A -> Sys tem Se tup


B -> SNM P S etu p
C -> Pas swo rd Setu p
D -> Tim ing So urce
E -> Cus tom er Info rma tio n Se tup
F -> SNT P S etu p
G -> DHC P R ela y Se tup
H -> Bri dge an d Ro ute r S etup
I -> Han d-w avi ng L ED set up
J -> SSH Se tup
K -> M13 Se tup
L -> RADIUS Setup

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


89
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.5.2. Customer Information Setup Procedure

The Customer Information Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
the port fields for XCU1(W) and XCU2(E). Type in the desired information up to 60 characters.
Press the Enter key.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA == = C ust omer In for mati on Set up = == 1 5:54 :57 08 /21/ 200 7
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, BA CKS PACE to ed it, ESC to abo rt

XCU 1(W ):
Cus tom er Info rma tio n
Por t- 1 XCU 1 P ort 1 cu sto mer ____ ___ ___ ____ ___ ___ ____ ___ ___ ____ ___ ___ _
Por t- 2 XCU 1 P ort 2 cu sto mer

XCU 2(E ):
Cus tom er Info rma tio n
Por t- 1 XCU 2 P ort 1 cu sto mer
Por t- 2 XCU 2 P ort 2 cu sto mer

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes.

>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

You will be returned to the System Config Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to the
Controller Menu.

The menu path for storing a configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


90
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.6. SNTP Setup


The full menu path for SNTP Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
F > SNTP Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.6.1. Setup Screen Access


To setup SNTP, press S from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA == = Co ntr oll er M enu == = 14:0 3:2 7 0 8/09 /20 07

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 12: 41:2 5 0 8/0 9/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on : V 1.01 .01 07 /24/ 200 7 Con nec t P ort : SU PV_P ORT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S -> Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H - > SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L - > Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d = 

The System Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press F.


O940 0R -CC4-CHA = == Sys tem Con fig urat ion Se tup === 14:0 4:0 7 0 8/09 /20 07

A -> Sys tem Se tup


B -> SNM P S etu p
C -> Pas swo rd Setu p
D -> Tim ing So urce
E -> Cus tom er Info rma tio n Se tup
F -> SNT P S etu p
G -> DHC P R ela y Se tup
H -> Bri dge an d Ro ute r S etup
I -> Han d-w avi ng L ED set up
J -> SSH Se tup
K -> M13 Se tup
L -> RAD IUS Se tup

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


91
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.6.2. SNTP Setup Procedure

The SNTP Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the SNTP
ON/OFF field. Use the Tab key to scroll in a setting. Choices are ON or OFF. Type in an IP
address for SNTP Server 1 and SNTP server 2.

Use the Tab key to scroll in a time zone setting. This is the number of hours that you must add
to or subtract from Greenwich Mean Time to obtain your local time. The setting range is 0, +1,
+2 … +12 and -12, -11… -1. You can find tables on the internet that display this information.
Press the Enter key.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA === SN TP Setu p = == 16:0 7:2 6 0 8/21 /20 07


ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

SNTP ON /OF F : ON
SNTP se rve r 1 : 1 68. 001. 020 .01 3
SNTP se rve r 2 : 1 68. 001. 020 .01 4

SNTP ti mez one : + 8

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes.

>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

You will be returned to the System Config Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to the
Controller Menu.

The menu path for storing a configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


92
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.7. DHCP Relay Setup


The full menu path for DHCP Relay Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
G > DHCP Relay Setup

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.7.1. Setup Screen Access


To setup DHCP Relay, press S from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA == = Co ntr oll er M enu == = 14:0 3:2 7 0 8/09 /20 07

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 12: 41:2 5 0 8/0 9/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S -> Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H - > SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L - > Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

The System Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press G.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA = == Sys tem Con fig urat ion Se tup === 14:0 4:0 7 0 8/09 /20 07

A -> Sys tem Se tup


B -> SNM P S etu p
C -> Pas swo rd Setu p
D -> Tim ing So urce
E -> Cus tom er Info rma tio n Se tup
F -> SNT P S etu p
G -> DHC P R ela y Se tup
H -> Bri dge an d Ro ute r S etup
I -> Han d-w avi ng L ED set up
J -> SSH Se tup
K -> M13 Se tup
L -> RAD IUS Se tup

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


93
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.7.2. DHCP Relay Setup Procedure

The DHCP Relay Setup screen will appear. Unless you already have a LAN interface in router
mode you cannot set up this screen.

NOTES: If you do not have a LAN interface in Router Mode please refer to Section
5.8.2, Bridge and Router Setup Procedure for setup instructions.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA === DHC P Rel ay S etu p = == 16:3 7:0 9 0 8/21 /20 07

DHCP se rve r IP : 000 .000 .00 0.0 00


DHCP re lay : Dis able

To a cti vat e DH CP rel ay, int erf ace Lan in rou ter mo de i s r equ ired .

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to each field. Type in the DHCP server IP address. Use
the Tab key to scroll in the DHCP Relay setting. Relay setting choices are ENABLE or
DISABLE. Press the Enter key.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === DHCP Relay Setup === 10:56:11 08/27/2007


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit
DHCP server IP : 10.3.11.1______
DHCP relay : Enable

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes.

>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

You will be returned to the System Config Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to the
Controller Menu.

The menu path for storing a configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


94
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.8. Bridge and Router Setup


The full menu path for Bridge and Router Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
H > Bridge and Router Setup

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.8.1. Setup Screen Access


To setup the Bridge and Router, press S from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA == = Co ntr oll er M enu == = 14:0 3:2 7 0 8/09 /20 07

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 12: 41:2 5 0 8/0 9/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S -> Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H - > SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L -> Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

The System Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press H.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA = == Sys tem Con fig urat ion Se tup === 14:0 4:0 7 0 8/09 /20 07

A -> Sys tem Se tup


B -> SNM P S etu p
C -> Pas swo rd Setu p
D -> Tim ing So urce
E -> Cus tom er Info rma tio n Se tup
F -> SNT P S etu p
G -> DHC P R ela y Se tup
H -> Bri dge an d Ro ute r S etup
I -> Han d-w avi ng L ED set up
J -> SSH Se tup
K -> M13 Se tup
L -> RAD IUS Se tup

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


95
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.8.2. Bridge and Router Setup Procedure

The Bridge and Router Setup screen will appear. Press the appropriate letter on your keyboard
to select the menu items shown in the screen below.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA === Br idge an d R oute r S etu p == = 17:1 8:0 3 0 8/21 /20 07

A -> Net wor k I nter fac e S etup I


B -> Net wor k I nter fac e S etup II
C -> Sta tic Ro ute Set up
D -> Bri dge Sp anni ng Tre e Se tup I
E -> Bri dge Sp anni ng Tre e Se tup II

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nt e r a com man d > >

6.8.2.1. Network Interface Setup I

Press A from the Bridge and Router Setup screen. (Total menu path is O > S > H > A.) The
Network Interface Setup I screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
network interface fields. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings.

Table 6-5 Netw ork Interface Setup I Settings


Network Interface Setup I Settings
Field Settings
Mode Bridge, Router
RIP RIP1, RIP2, OFF
Note: These settings are required
for Router mode only
IP Address Required for Router mode only
Subnet Mask
Frame Permanently set to Ethernet for
LAN
For other interfaces: PPP,HDLC

After entering your settings, press the Enter key.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA = == Net work In ter face Se tup I = == 17:3 3:0 9 0 8/21 /20 07
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

NI M ode RIP IP Add res s S ubne tMa sk F ram e


L AN B rid ge NA 00 0.0 00. 000. 000 0 00.0 00. 000 .000 E the rnet
X CU1 -DC C1 B rid ge NA 00 0.0 00. 000. 000 0 00.0 00. 000 .000 H DLC
X CU1 -DC C2 B rid ge NA 00 0.0 00. 000. 000 0 00.0 00. 000 .000 H DLC
X CU2 -DC C1 B rid ge NA 00 0.0 00. 000. 000 0 00.0 00. 000 .000 H DLC
X CU2 -DC C2 B rid ge NA 00 0.0 00. 000. 000 0 00.0 00. 000 .000 H DLC

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes. Press Enter

>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


96
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Press the Esc key to return to the System Config Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to
the Controller Menu.

The menu path for storing a configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

6.8.2.2. Network Interface Setup II

Press B from the Bridge and Router Setup screen. (Total menu path is O > S > H > B.)
The Network Interface Setup II screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
network interface fields. Use the Tab key to scroll in the settings.

NOTES: Some settings must be typed in.

Table 6-6 Network Interface Setup II Settings


Network Interface Setup II Settings
Field Settings
Mode Bridge, Router, DISABLE
RIP RIP1, RIP2, OFF
Note: These settings are required
for Router mode only
IP Address Required for Router mode only
Subnet mask
Frame PPP,HDLC

After entering your settings press the Enter key.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA = == Net work In ter face Se tup II === 17:4 6:4 3 0 8/21 /20 07
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

NI M ode RIP IP Add res s S ubne tMa sk F ram e


T rib 1- D CC1 D ISA BLE NA X. X.X .X X .X.X .X H DLC
T rib 1- D CC2 D ISA BLE NA X. X.X .X X .X.X .X H DLC
T rib 2- D CC1 D ISA BLE NA X. X.X .X X .X.X .X H DLC
T rib 2- D CC2 D ISA BLE NA X. X.X .X X .X.X .X H DLC
T rib 3- D CC1 D ISA BLE NA X. X.X .X X .X.X .X H DLC
T rib 3- D CC2 D ISA BLE NA X. X.X .X X .X.X .X H DLC
T rib 4- D CC1 D ISA BLE NA X. X.X .X X .X.X .X H DLC
T rib 4- D CC2 D ISA BLE NA X. X.X .X X .X.X .X H DLC
T rib 5- D CC1 D ISA BLE NA X. X.X .X X .X.X .X H DLC
T rib 5- D CC2 D ISA BLE NA X. X.X .X X .X.X .X H DLC
T rib 6- D CC1 D ISA BLE NA X. X.X .X X .X.X .X H DLC
T rib 6- D CC2 D ISA BLE NA X. X.X .X X .X.X .X H DLC
T rib 7- D CC1 D ISA BLE NA X. X.X .X X .X.X .X H DLC
T rib 7- D CC2 D ISA BLE NA X. X.X .X X .X.X .X H DLC
T rib 8- D CC1 D ISA BLE NA X. X.X .X X .X.X .X H DLC
T rib 8- D CC2 D ISA BLE NA X. X.X .X X .X.X .X H DLC

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes. Press Enter

>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


97
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Press the Esc key to return to the System Config Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to
the Controller Menu.

The menu path for storing a configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

6.8.2.3. Static Route Setup

Press C from the Bridge and Router Setup screen. (Total menu path is O > S > H > C.)
The Static Route Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to each
setup field.

For Router mode, type in the Net Destination Address, Netmask and the Gateway Address.
Press the Enter key.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA === Sta tic Ro ute Set up === 18:0 4:3 9 0 8/21 /20 07
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : n nn.n nn. nnn .nnn , B ACK SPAC E t o e dit

Ne t_D est inat ion N etma sk G ate way_ Add res s NI


00 0.0 00. 000. 000 0 00.0 00. 000 .000 0 00. 000. 000 .00 0 NON E
00 0.0 00. 000. 000 0 00.0 00. 000 .000 0 00. 000. 000 .00 0 NON E
00 0.0 00. 000. 000 0 00.0 00. 000 .000 0 00. 000. 000 .00 0 NON E
00 0.0 00. 000. 000 0 00.0 00. 000 .000 0 00. 000. 000 .00 0 NON E
00 0.0 00. 000. 000 0 00.0 00. 000 .000 0 00. 000. 000 .00 0 NON E
00 0.0 00. 000. 000 0 00.0 00. 000 .000 0 00. 000. 000 .00 0 NON E
00 0.0 00. 000. 000 0 00.0 00. 000 .000 0 00. 000. 000 .00 0 NON E
00 0.0 00. 000. 000 0 00.0 00. 000 .000 0 00. 000. 000 .00 0 NON E
00 0.0 00. 000. 000 0 00.0 00. 000 .000 0 00. 000. 000 .00 0 NON E
00 0.0 00. 000. 000 0 00.0 00. 000 .000 0 00. 000. 000 .00 0 NON E
00 0.0 00. 000. 000 0 00.0 00. 000 .000 0 00. 000. 000 .00 0 NON E
00 0.0 00. 000. 000 0 00.0 00. 000 .000 0 00. 000. 000 .00 0 NON E
00 0.0 00. 000. 000 0 00.0 00. 000 .000 0 00. 000. 000 .00 0 NON E
00 0.0 00. 000. 000 0 00.0 00. 000 .000 0 00. 000. 000 .00 0 NON E
00 0.0 00. 000. 000 0 00.0 00. 000 .000 0 00. 000. 000 .00 0 NON E
00 0.0 00. 000. 000 0 00.0 00. 000 .000 0 00. 000. 000 .00 0 NON E

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes. Press Enter

>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

Press the Esc key to return to the System Config Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to
the Controller Menu.

The menu path for storing a configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

6.8.2.4. Bridge Spanning Tree Setup I

Press D from the Bridge and Router Setup screen. (Total menu path is O > S > H > D.)

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


98
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The Bridge Spanning Tree Setup I screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
each setup field. The range of settings will be displayed at the top of the screen every time you
move your cursor to a different field.

NOTES: Some settings must be typed in.

Table 6-7 Bridge Spanning Tree Setup I Settings


Bridge Spanning Tree Setup I Settings
Field Settings
Bridge ID Priority 0 to 65535
Bridge Max Age 6 to 40 (seconds)
Hello Time 1 to 10 (seconds)
Forward Delay 4 to 30 (seconds)
Aging Time 10 to 999 (seconds)
Port Cost 1 to 999
Port Priority 0 to 255
Port Edg-P Yes, No
Port P-P

After entering your settings press the Enter key.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA == = B rid ge S pan nin g Tr ee Set up I == = 18:1 8:0 5 0 8/21 /20 07
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : 0 to 655 35, BAC KSP ACE to edi t

Desi gna ted Roo t M AC ADDR : 005 0C60 129 1D


Desi gna ted Roo t P rio rity : 327 68
Desi gna ted Roo t C ost : 0
Root Ma x A ge : 20 sec Hel lo T ime : 2 sec For war d D elay : 15 sec

Brid ge ID MAC ADD R : 005 0C60 129 1D


Brid ge ID Prio rit y : 327 68
Brid ge Max Age : 20 sec Hel lo T ime : 02 sec For war d D elay : 15 sec
Agin g t ime : 300 sec

Port R oot -P Stat e C ost Pri o E dg- P P- P


---- --- --- - --- -- ---- - - --- --- - - --- - -- -
FEC No Fwd 0 19 128 No No
XCU1 -DC C1 No Dis 0 19 128 No Ye s
XCU1 -DC C2 No Dis 0 19 128 No Ye s
XCU2 -DC C1 No Dis 0 19 128 No Ye s
XCU2 -DC C2 No Dis 0 19 128 No Ye s

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes.

>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

You will be returned to the System Config Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to the
Controller Menu.

The menu path for storing a configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


99
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.8.2.5. Bridge Spanning Tree Setup II

Press E from the Bridge and Router Setup screen. (Total menu path is O > S > H > E.)
The Bridge Spanning Tree Setup II screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor
to each setup field. Use the Tab key to scroll in the settings.

NOTES: Some settings must be typed in.

Table 6-8 Bridge Spanning Tree Setup II Settings


Bridge Spanning Tree Setup I Settings
Field Settings
Cost 1 to 999
Priority 0 to 255
Edg-P No, Yes

After entering your settings press the Enter key.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA === Br idg e Sp ann ing Tre e S etu p II == = 18:2 9:3 0 0 8/21 /20 07
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : 0 to 255 , B ACKS PAC E t o ed it

Port Root -P Sta te C ost Pr io E dg- P P -P


---- --- --- ---- -- --- -- - --- -- -- - --- - - --
Trib 1- D CC1 No Di s 0 19 12 8 No Y es
Trib 1- D CC2 No Di s 0 19 12 8 No Y es
Trib 2- D CC1 No Di s 0 19 12 8 No Y es
Trib 2- D CC2 No Di s 0 19 12 8 No Y es
Trib 3- D CC1 No Di s 0 19 12 8 No Y es
Trib 3- D CC2 No Di s 0 19 12 8 No Y es
Trib 4- D CC1 No Di s 0 19 12 8 No Y es
Trib 4- D CC2 No Di s 0 19 12 8 No Y es
Trib 5- D CC1 No Di s 0 19 12 8 No Y es
Trib 5- D CC2 No Di s 0 19 12 8 No Y es
Trib 6- D CC1 No Di s 0 19 12 8 No Y es
Trib 6- D CC2 No Di s 0 19 12 8 No Y es
Trib 7- D CC1 No Di s 0 19 12 8 No Y es
Trib 7- D CC2 No Di s 0 19 12 8 No Y es
Trib 8- D CC1 No Di s 0 19 12 8 No Y es
Trib 8- D CC2 No Di s 0 19 12 8 No Y es

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes.

>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

You will be returned to the System Config Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to the
Controller Menu.

The menu path for storing a configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


100
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.9. Hand-waving LED Setup


This is to start or stop hand-waving LED operation and to set a timer. This operation is to
indicate which O9400R unit we are presently controlling.

When Hand Waving


command is turn on,
the ACT, TEST, &
ALM LEDs will be
Flashing Green at the
same time

The full menu path for Hand-waving LED Setup is as follows:


O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
I > Hand-waving LED Setup

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.9.1. Setup Screen Access


To setup the Hand-waving LED , press S from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA == = Co ntr oll er M enu == = 14:0 3:2 7 0 8/09 /20 07

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 12: 41:2 5 0 8/0 9/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S -> Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H - > SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L - > Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N -> Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


101
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The System Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press I.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA = == Sys tem Con fig urat ion Se tup === 14:0 4: 0 7 0 8/09 /20 07

A -> Sys tem Se tup


B -> SNM P S etu p
C -> Pas swo rd Setu p
D -> Tim ing So urce
E -> Cus tom er Info rma tio n Se tup
F -> SNT P S etu p
G -> DHC P R ela y Se tup
H -> Bri dge an d Ro ute r S etup
I -> Han d-w avi ng L ED set up
J -> SSH Se tup
K -> M13 Se tup
L -> RAD IUS Se tup

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

6.9.2. Hand-waving LED Setup Procedure

The Hand-waving LED Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
each setup field. Use the Tab key to scroll in the settings.

NOTES: Some settings must be typed in.

Table 6-9 Hand-waving LED Settings


Hand-waving LED Settings
Field Settings
Command STOP, START
Timer 0 to 99999.

Press the Enter key.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA = == Hand -wa vin g LE D S etu p == = 14: 48: 58 08/2 2/2 007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

Co mma nd : ST OP
Ti mer : 00 180
(0 mea ns the LED fl ashi ng wil l la st for ever af ter the st art com man d.)

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes.

To start LED flashing>> (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

You will be returned to the System Config Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to the
Controller Menu.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


102
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The menu path for storing a configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

6.10. SSH Setup


The full menu path for SSH Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
J > SSH Setup

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.10.1. Setup Screen Access


To setup SSH, press S from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA = == C ont rol ler Men u = == 14: 03: 27 08/0 9/2 007

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 12: 41:2 5 0 8/0 9/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S -> Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H - > SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L -> Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N -> Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X -> Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


103
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The System Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press J.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA === Sy stem Co nfi gura tio n S etup == = 14: 04: 07 08/0 9/2 007

A -> Sys tem Se tup


B -> SNM P S etu p
C -> Pas swo rd Setu p
D -> Tim ing So urce
E -> Cus tom er Info rma tio n Se tup
F -> SNT P S etu p
G -> DHC P R ela y Se tup
H -> Bri dge an d Ro ute r S etup
I -> Han d-w avi ng L ED set up
J -> SSH Se tup
K -> M13 se tup
L -> RAD IUS Se tup

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

6.10.2. SSH Setup Procedure

The SSH Setup screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in a setting. Choices are On or
OFF.

Press the Enter key.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA == = S SH Setu p = == 14: 59: 35 08/2 2/2 007


ARRO W K EYS : C URS OR MOVE , ENT ER K EY : I TEM SEL ECT

SSH Ser ver : O FF

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes.

>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

You will be returned to the System Config Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to the
Controller Menu.

The menu path for storing a configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


104
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.11. M13 Setup


The full menu path for M13 Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
K > M13 Setup

This setup is to enable or disable the M13 function on the E3T3 card. Before you register the
E3T3 card to T3-M13 mode, be sure to enable the M13 function first.

NOTES: The M13 function only supports unframed E1/T1.

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.11.1. Setup Screen Access


To setup SSH, press S from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA = == C ont rol ler Men u = == 14: 03: 27 08/0 9/2 007

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 12: 41:2 5 0 8/0 9/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S -> Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L - > Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G -> Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nt e r a com man d == =>

The System Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press K.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA === Sy stem Co nfi gura tio n S etup == = 14: 04: 07 08/0 9/2 007

A -> Sys tem Se tup


B -> SNM P S etu p
C -> Pas swo rd Setu p
D -> Tim ing So urce
E -> Cus tom er Info rma tio n Se tup
F -> SNT P S etu p
G -> DHC P R ela y Se tup
H -> Bri dge an d Ro ute r S etup
I -> Han d-w avi ng L ED set up
J -> SSH Se tup
K -> M13 se tup
L -> RAD IUS Se tup

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


105
User’s Manual
O9400-R

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

Make sure the E3T3 card is in O9400R already. The card location will show on the screen. Use
the command “M13 Enable”, choose the E3T3 card’s located slot and press ENTER. A prompt
will ask, “Reset the E3/T3 card now?” Press Y to confirm. The M13 function will then be
enabled.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === M13 Setup === 15:37:32 07/28/2010


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

Slot Card Model Serial Number M13 Function


==== ========== ============= ============
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6 E3/T3 015405 M13 Disable
#7
#8

Command : M13 Enable


Unit : Trib-6

The new setting will take effect after restart the E3/T3 card.
>> Reset the E3/T3 card now ? [Y/N]

NOTES: Once the M13 function is enabled on one E3T3 card, the E3T3 card will
always support M13 function. If the card is taken out of the chassis and being
inserted into another slot, the M13 function will remain, you do not need to
enable the M13 function again.

The only way to disable the M13 function is to choose the command “M13
Disable”. Then, select the E3T3 card’s located slot and press ENTER. A
prompt will ask, “Reset the E3/T3 card now?” Press Y to confirm. The M13
function will then be disabled.

6.12. RADIUS Setup


The full menu path for M13 Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
L > RADIUS Setup

This function is to support Radius client function for user to login by the account registered at
Radius Server via console port of O9400R or remote login.
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.
106
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.12.1. Setup Screen Access


To setup SSH, press S from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA = == C ont rol ler Men u = == 14: 03: 27 08/0 9/2 007

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 12: 41:2 5 0 8/0 9/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S -> Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H - > SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L -> Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

The System Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press L.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA === Sy stem Co nfi gura tio n S etup == = 14: 04: 07 08/0 9/2 007

A -> Sys tem Se tup


B -> SNM P S etu p
C -> Pas swo rd Setu p
D -> Tim ing So urce
E -> Cus tom er Info rma tio n Se tup
F -> SNT P S etu p
G -> DHC P R ela y Se tup
H -> Bri dge an d Ro ute r S etup
I -> Han d- w avi ng L ED set up
J -> SSH Se tup
K -> M13 se tup
L -> RAD IUS Se tup

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


107
User’s Manual
O9400-R

To enable this function you need to set the account numbers at radius sever.
O9400R-CC4-CHA === RADIUS setup === 10:37:37 11/04/2015
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

Server1: DISABLE
IP: 000.000.000.000
Key:
Port: 01812

Server2: DISABLE
IP: 000.000.000.000
Key:
Port: 01812

OPERATOR Privilege Level: 002


ADMIN Privilege Level: 005

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 6-10 RADIUS Settings


Field Option Default
Server1/2 Enable, Disable Disable
IP Server IP 0.0.0.0
Key Max 64 chars Empty
Port 1~65535 01812 (Radius
port)
OPERATOR Privilege 0~255 2
Level
ADMIN Privilege 0~255 5
Level

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


108
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.13. System Mode Setup


The full menu path for System Mode Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
H > SDH/SONET Config Setup
A > System Mode Setup

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.13.1. Setup Screen Access


To setup the System Mode, press H from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA = == C ont rol ler Men u = == 16: 37: 43 08/1 0/2 007

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S - > Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M -> Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L - > Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z -> Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

The SDH/SONET Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press A.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA == = S DH/ SONE T C onf igur ati on Setu p = == 10: 11: 42 07/0 7/2 011

A -> Sys tem Mo de S etu p


B -> Ove rhe ad Setu p
C -> Cro ss Con nect Cr eat e Se tup
D -> Cro ss Con nect De let e Se tup
E -> ALS /AP SD Setu p
F -> DCC Ch ann el S etu p
G -> Pat h G ran ular ity
H -> MSP AP S C omma nd
J -> Map Ch ang e
K -> Map De let e
L -> Map Co py
M -> SNC P/U PSR APS Co mma nd
N -> Idl e P ath Ala rm Ins erti on Set up
O -> Pat h-p rot ecte d T SA Setu p
P -> Cle ar XCU Port Cr oss Con nec t

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


109
User’s Manual
O9400-R

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

6.13.2. System Mode Setup

The System Mode Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move your cursor to the
various fields. Use the Tab key to scroll in the settings.

NOTES: Some settings must be typed in.

Table 6-11 System Mode Settings


System Mode Settings
Field SDH Settings SONET Settings
SDH/SONET SDH SONET
MSP 1+1 WTR Timer 3 to 900 (seconds)
Group1 Member XCU1-P1 & XCU2-P1;
XCU1-P1 & XCU1-P2
Group2 Member XCU1-P2 & XCU2-P2;
XCU2-P1 & XCU2-P2
Aggregate Line Port Settings
Mode NP, MSP1+1 NP, MSP1+1
Rate STM1, STM4 OC3, OC12
MSP 1+1 Protect ON, OFF
MSP 1+1 Revertive Revertive, Non-Revertive
MSP 1+1 Direction Uni-Direct, Bi-Direct
SNCP/UPSR Mode Intrusive, Non-Intrusive

NOTES: With MSP 1+1 protection, if one fails it will automatically go to the other. The
1. setting in seconds determines how long it will take to revert when the failure
has recovered.
2. The following drawing illustrates aggregate line protection with the grouping
types listed in the table above.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


110
User’s Manual
O9400-R

XCU1 XCU2

P2 P2 Group 2

P1 P1 Group 1

XCU1 XCU2

P2 P2

Group 1 Group 2
P1 P1

Figure 6-1 Aggregate Line Protection Grouping


After selecting your settings, press the Enter key.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === System Mode Setup === 10:14:56 07/07/2011


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
SDH/SONET Mode : SDH MSP WTR Timer : 100 seconds
Group1 Member : XCU1-P1 & XCU2-P1 SNCP/UPSR Mode : Non-Intrusive
Group2 Member : XCU1-P2 & XCU2-P2
================== Aggregate Line Protection Switch Group1 ==================
Mode : NP
XCU1-P1 Rate : STM4 XCU2-P1 Rate : STM4

[MSP1+1]
Protection: ----
Revertive : ----
Direction : ----

================== Aggregate Line Protection Switch Group2 ==================


Mode : NP
XCU1-P2 Rate : STM4 XCU2-P2 Rate : STM4

[MSP1+1]
Protection: ----
Revertive : ----
Direction : ----

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you wish to change the Configuration. Press Y for yes. Press Enter.

>> C ha n ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


111
User’s Manual
O9400-R

You will be returned to the SDH/SONET Configuration Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return
to the Controller Menu. You must now store the new configuration. The menu path for storing a
configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

6.14. Overhead Setup


The full menu path for Overhead Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
H > SDH/SONET Config Setup
B > Overhead Setup

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.14.1. Setup Screen Access


To setup Overhead, press H from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA == = C ont roll er Men u == = 16: 37: 43


08/1 0/2 007

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S - > Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L - > Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


112
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The SDH/SONET Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press B.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA == = S DH/ SONE T C onf igur ati on Setu p = == 10: 11: 42 07/0 7/2 011

A -> Sys tem Mo de S etu p


B -> Ove rhe ad Setu p
C -> Cro ss Con nect Cr eat e Se tup
D -> Cro ss Con nect De let e Se tup
E -> ALS /AP SD Setu p
F -> DCC Ch ann el S etu p
G -> Pat h G ran ular ity
H -> MSP AP S C omma nd
J -> Map Ch ang e
K -> Map De let e
L -> Map Co py
M -> SNC P/U PSR APS Co mma nd
N -> Idl e P ath Ala rm Ins erti on Set up
O -> Pat h-p rot ecte d T SA Setu p
P -> Cle ar XCU Port Cr oss Con nec t

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

6.14.2. Overhead Setup Procedure

The Overhead Setup screen will appear. Press 1 or 2 depending on what you want to set up.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Overhead Setup === 15:31:26 08/22/2007

1 -> Line Overhead Setup


2 -> HO-Path/STS-Path Overhead Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

6.14.2.1. Line Overhead Setup

Press 1 from the Trace Message Setup screen. The Line Trace Message Setup screen will
appear. Use the arrow keys to move your cursor to the various fields. Use the Tab key to
scroll in the settings.

Table 6-12 Line Overhead Settings


Line Overhead Settings
Field Settings
Line Side XCU1(W), XCU(2)E
Aggregate Line Port1, Port2

Press the Enter key.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


113
User’s Manual
O9400-R

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Line Trace Message Setup === 15:36:01 08/22/2007


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Line Side : XCU1(W) Aggregate line : Port-1

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

The following screen will appear. Scroll in a setting for JO_LEN. Press the Enter key. A
sample NULL setting screen is shown below.

Table 6-13 JO_LEN Settings


Field Setting Options Default Setting Notes
J0_LEN NULL, NULL
16-BYTE(Space Padding),
16-BYTE(NULL Padding),
1-BYTE

Available choices are:

ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS


Line Side : XCU1(W) Aggregate line : Port-1

J0 _LE N : NUL L

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

The following screen will appear, when the J0_LEN setting is 16-BYTE(Space Padding).
Type in an identifying name for EXP_J0_MSG and TX_J0_MSG. Press the Enter
key.

NOTES: The message fields can be left blank but that would defeat the purpose of
attaching a message. A message identifies the Loop device to a downstream
= unit.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Line Trace Message Setup === 14:14:25 05/06/2009


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort
Line Side : XCU1(W) Aggregate line : Port-1

J0_LEN : 16-BYTE(Space Padding)


EXP_J0_MSG : LOOP
TX_J0_MSG : LOOP___________

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you wish to change the Configuration. Press Y for yes.

>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


114
User’s Manual
O9400-R

You will be returned to the Trace Message Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to the
SDH/SONET Configuration Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to the Controller Menu.
You must now store the new configuration. The menu path for storing a configuration:
V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

6.14.2.2. HO-Path/STS-Path Overhead Setup


Press 2 from the Trace Message Setup screen. The HO-Path/STS-Path Overhead Setup
screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move your cursor to the various fields. Use theTab
key to scroll in the settings.

NOTES: Some settings must be typed in.

Table 6-14 HO-Path/STS-Path Overhead Settings


HO-Path/STS-Path Overhead Overhead Settings
Field SDH Settings SONET Settings
Line Side XCU1(W), XCU2(E)
Aggregate Line Port1, Port2
AUG1# 1 to 4 -
STS3# - 1 to 4

O940 0R -CC4-CHA = == H O-P ath /STS -Pa th Trac e M ess age Set up =16: 00: 34 08/2 2/2 007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS
Line Si de : XC U1( W) Aggr ega te line : Por t- 2
AUG1 # : 1

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

Press the Enter key. A fresh screen will appear as shown below. You must input the required
settings.
Table 6-15 J1_LEN/HP_EPSL Settings
Field Setting Options Default Setting Notes
J1_LEN NULL, NULL
16-BYTE(Space Padding),
16-BYTE(NULL Padding),
1-BYTE
HP_EPSL/EPSL-P 0 to 0xFF
HP_TX_PSL/ 0 to 0xFF
TX_PSLP

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


115
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Press the Enter key.


O9400R-CC4-CHA === HO-Path/STS-Path Overhead Setup === 10:48:45 10/22/2009
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Line Side : XCU1(W) Aggregate line : Port-1
AUG1# : 1

J1_LEN : NULL

HP_EPSL : 02 ( TUG )
HP_TX_PSL : 02 ( TUG )

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you wish to change the Configuration. Press Y for yes.

>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

You will be returned to the Trace Message Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to
SDH/SONET Configuration Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to the Controller Menu.
You must now store the new configuration. The menu path for storing a configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


116
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.15. Cross Connect Create


The full menu path for Cross Connect Create is as follows:
O > Logon
H > SDH/SONET Config Setup
C > Cross Connect Create

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.15.1. Setup Screen Access


To setup the Cross Connect, press H from the Controller Menu.
O940 0R -CC4-CHA = == C ont rol ler Men u = == 16: 37: 43 08/1 0/2 007

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S -> Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L - > Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V -> St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

The SDH/SONET Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press C.


O940 0R -CC4-CHA == = S DH/ SONE T C onf igur ati on Setu p = == 10: 11: 42 07/0 7/2 011

A -> Sys tem Mo de S etu p


B -> Ove rhe ad Setu p
C -> Cro ss Con nect Cr eat e Se tup
D -> Cro ss Con nect De let e Se tup
E -> ALS /AP SD Setu p
F -> DCC Ch ann el S etu p
G -> Pat h G ran ular ity
H -> MSP AP S C omma nd
J -> Map Ch ang e
K -> Map De let e
L -> Map Co py
M -> SNC P/U PSR APS Co mma nd
N -> Idl e P ath Ala rm Ins erti on Set up
O -> Pat h-p rot ecte d T SA Setu p
P -> Cle ar XCU Port Cr oss Con nec t

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


117
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.15.2. Cross Connect Create

A sample setup screen is shown below.

Xcon type is used to set the cross connect type.


Xcon Type : Bi-Xc

Count is used to establish the number of cross connects you wish to make at one time.
Count : 63

KLM is the standard mapper for SDH. (The standard mapper for SONET is also KLM but the
parameters are different then those shown here.)
KLM : [ TUG3#1, TUG2#1, TU12#1 ]

Source displays the source slot channel status.


o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

Destination displays the destination slot channel status.


o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

‘0’ means that a timeslot is free for setting up a cross-connect. ‘X’ means that a cross-connect
already exists on that timeslot or the path granularity of card is mismatched.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Cross Connect Create === 11:00:38 08/15/2007


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Granularity : TU12
Map : map1
------------------------------- Source -------------------------------------
From Slot : XCU1(W) From AUG1 : 1
From Port : 1 From TS : 1 -VC3/TUG3 01 -VC1x
Count : 63 KLM : [ TUG3#1, TUG2#1, TU12#1 ]
------------------------------- Destination --------------------------------
To Slot : Trib-5
To Port : 01
Xcon Type : Bi-Xc

VC3/TUG3 VC1x : Source -> XCU1(W) Port#1 AUG1#1 Timeslot Available


#1 01 to 21 : o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
#2 01 to 21 : o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
#3 01 to 21 : o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

E1 PORT : Destination -> Trib-5 Timeslot Available


#01 to 21 : o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
#22 to 42 : o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
#43 to 63 : o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


118
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The example below shows the Cross Connect Create Setup with Ethernet Card.

NOTES: (02) and o o mean Timeslot Available. Available timeslot is 2 STS3C

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Cross Connect Create Setup === 11:39:24 04/26/2012


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 2 to 9, BACKSPACE to edit
Granularity : STS3C
Xcon Type : Bi-Xc
Count : 01
-------------------------------- Source --------------------------------------
From Slot : Trib-7
From WAN : 2 From TS : 01 -Channel
-------------------------------- Destination ---------------------------------
To Slot : Trib-7
To WAN : 3 To TS : 01 -Channel

ENET CHANNEL : Source -> Trib-7 WAN#2 Timeslot Available(02)


#01 to 02 : o o
ENET CHANNEL : Destination -> Trib-7 WAN#3 Timeslot Available(02)
#01 to 02 : o o
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

There are six basic steps to setting up a cross-connect on the O9400R.

1. Select the granularity


Table 6-16 Granularity Settings
Field Granularity Settings
SDH TU11, TU12, AU4/C4, TU3, AU3/C3
SONET VT2, STS3C, STS1 and VT15

2. Select a Map Number (map 1 or map 2)

3. Select a Source slot (ie. a ‘from’ slot). The available options are: XCU1(W), XCU2(E), TRIB-
1, TRIB-3, TRIB-5, TRIB-6, TRIB-7, TRIB-8 and INB.E1. Then, according to the type of card in
the source slot you chose, you must choose a parameter. Parameter options are listed in Table
6- 16, below.

Table 6-17 Cross Connect Create Parameter Setting Options


Slot Type Parameters Parameter
SDH SONET Setting
Options
XCU1(W) or XCU2(E) Port# 1 to 2
AUG1# STS3# 1 to 4
VC3/TUG3# STS1# 1 to 3
VC1x# VTx# 1 to 28

E1/T1 card Port# 1 to 63

B155/622 card Port# 1 to 2


AUG1#1 STS3# 1 to 4
VC3/TUG3# STS1# 1 to 3
VC1x VTx# 1 to 28

INB. E1 (Inband E1) Port# 1

Ethernet card WAN# 1 to 9


Channel# 1 to 63

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


119
User’s Manual
O9400-R

E3/T3 card Port# 1 to 3


Channel# 1 to 28

7FOM Port# 1 to 7
Channel 1 to 4

Example of SDH Cross Connect Settings on the Ethernet Card


Mode Available Available Available Channel per
LAN port WAN port Granularity Setting
e-line(8FE) 8 (binding) 8 (WAN2 to TU11 1 to 63
WAN9) TU12 1 to 63
AU4/C4 NP (No protection)
TRIB 5, 6 1
TRIB 7, 8 2
PRTD
TRIB 1, 3 1
TRIB 5 2
TRIP 7 4
TU3 NP (No protection)
TRIB 5, 6 3
TRIB 7, 8 6
PRTD
TRIB 1, 3 3
TRIB 5 6
TRIP 7 12
AU3/C3 NP (No protection)
TRIB 5, 6 3
TRIB 7, 8 6
PRTD
TRIB 1, 3 3
TRIB 5 6
TRIP 7 12
e-line(1GE) 1 (binding) 1
e-lan(8FE) 9 8
e-lan (1GE) 9 1
portmap(8FE) 9 8
portmap(1GE) 9 1

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


120
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Example of SONET Cross Connect Setting on Ethernet Card


Mode Available Available Available Channel per
LAN port WAN port Granularity Setting
e-line(8FE) 8 8 (WAN2 to VT1.5/VT 1 to 63
(binding) WAN9) 2
STS3C NP (No protection)
TRIB 5, 6 1
TRIB 7, 8 2
PRTD
TRIB 1, 3 1
TRIB 5 2
TRIP 7 4
STS1 NP (No protection)
TRIB 5, 6 3
TRIB 7, 8 6
PRTD
TRIB 1, 3 3
TRIB 5 6
TRIP 7 12
e-line(1GE) 1 1
(binding)
e-lan(8FE) 9 8
e-lan (1GE) 9 1
portmap(8FE 9 8
)
portmap(1G 9 1
E)
4. Select a channel count (ie. how many channels you want to set a cross connect for at one
time).
For example, if you choose a source channel as:
Source Channel: XCU1(W) Port#1 AUG1#1 VC3/TUG3#1 VC1x#3;
and you choose a destination channel as:
Destination Channel: TRIB1(E1) Port#3;
and you set the count at 5, you will create the following 5 cross-connects.

5. Select a Destination slot (ie. a ‘to’ slot). The available options are: XCU1(W), XCU2(E),
TRIB- 1, TRIB-3, TRIB-5, TRIB-6, TRIB-7, TRIB-8 and INB.E1 Then, according to the type of
card in the destination slot you chose, you must choose a parameter. Parameter options are
listed in Table 6-16, above.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


121
User’s Manual
O9400-R

From Source Channel To Destination Channel


XCU1(W) Port#1 AUG1#1 VC3/TUG3#1  TRIB1(E1 card) Port#3
VC1x#3

XCU1(W) Port#1 AUG1#1 VC3/TUG3#1  TRIB1(E1 card) Port#4


VC1x#4

XCU1(W) Port#1 AUG1#1 VC3/TUG3#1  TRIB1(E1 card) Port#5


VC1x#5

XCU1(W) Port#1 AUG1#1 VC3/TUG3#1  TRIB1(E1 card) Port#6


VC1x#6

XCU1(W) Port#1 AUG1#1 VC3/TUG3#1  TRIB1(E1 card) Port#7


VC1x#7

6. Select the Xcon Type.


Setting options are: UNI-XC (uni-directional XC),
BI-XC (bi-directional XC)

Table 6-18 Cross Connect Type Settings


Field Setting Options
Xcon Type UNI-XC (uni-directional XC)
BI-XC (bi-directional XC)

Uni-XC

Source Destination

Bi-XC

Source Destination

Figure 6-2 Cross Connect Diagram

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


122
User’s Manual
O9400-R

7. After all parameters have been selected, press the Enter key.

A prompt will ask if you are sure. Press Y for yes.

>>Are you sure (Y/N)?

If your mapping is successful the following “Success” prompt will be superimposed on your
existing screen.

XC Success!!!

You must now store the new mapping configuration. Press the Esc key twice to return to the
SDH/SONET Configuration Setup. Press the Esc key to return to the Controller Menu. The
menu path for storing a configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


123
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.16. Cross Connect Delete


The full menu path for Cross Connect Delete is as follows:
O > Logon
H > SDH/SONET Config Setup
D > Cross Connect Delete

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.16.1. Setup Screen Access


To delete the Cross Connect, press H from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA == = Co ntr oll er M enu == = 16:3 7:4 3 0 8/10 /20 07

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S - > Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L - > Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


124
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The SDH/SONET Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press D.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA = == SDH /SON ET Con figu rat ion Set up === 10 :11 :42 07/ 07/ 201 1

A -> Sys tem Mo de S etu p


B -> Ove rhe ad Setu p
C -> Cro ss Con nect Cr eat e Se tup
D -> Cro ss Con nect De let e Se tup
E -> ALS /AP SD Setu p
F -> DCC Ch ann el S etu p
G -> Pat h G ran ular ity
H -> MSP AP S C omma nd
J -> Map Ch ang e
K -> Map De let e
L -> Map Co py
M -> SNC P/U PSR APS Co mma nd
N -> Idl e P ath Ala rm Ins erti on Set up
O -> Pat h- p rot ecte d T SA Setu p
P -> Cle ar XCU Port Cr oss Con nec t

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

6.16.1.1. Cross Connect Delete Setup Procedure

The Cross Connect Delete screen will appear. The procedure for deleting a cross connect is
similar to the procedure for setting up a cross connect, except that you only need to select the
map, count and destination channel. Use the arrow key to move the cursor.

Scroll in your setting for Map. Choices are: map1 and map2.
Type in your setting for Count. Setting range is 1 to 84.

Press the Enter key.

Table 6-19 Cross Connect Delete Settings

Cross Connect Delete Settings


Field Settings
Map map1, map2
Count 1 to 84

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


125
User’s Manual
O9400-R

O940 0R -CC4-CHA === Cro ss Con nect De let e == = 16 :18: 27 08/ 22/2 007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

Map : map 1

Coun t : 01
---- --- --- ---- --- --- ---- --- --- - De sti nat ion --- --- ---- --- --- ---- --- --- ---- --
To S lot : XCU 1(W) To AU G1 : 1
To P ort : 1 To TS : 1 -VC3 /TU G3 01 -VC 1x
KL M : [ TUG3 #1, TU G2#1 , T U12 #1 ]

VC3/ TUG 3 V C1x : Des tina tio n - > XC U1( W) Port #1 AUG 1#1 Tim esl ot A vai lab le
#1 0 1 to 21 : o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
#2 0 1 to 21 : o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
#3 0 1 to 21 : o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

A prompt will ask if you are sure. Press Y for Yes if you want to delete.

>>Are you sure (Y/N)?

A fresh prompt will advise you that the deletion was successful.

XC Delete Success!!!

This procedure is complete. Press the Esc key twice to return to the Controller Menu.
The full menu path for storing a configuration is as follow:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


126
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.17. ALS/APSD Setup


ALS/APSD is an acronym for Automatic Laser Shutdown/Automatic Power Shutdown.
The full menu path for ALS/APSD Setup is as follows:

O > Logon
H > SDH/SONET Config Setup
E > ALS/APSD Setup

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.17.1. Setup Screen Access


To setup the ALS/APSD, press H from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA == = Co ntr oll er M enu == = 16:3 7:4 3 0 8/10 /20 07

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S - > Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L - > Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


127
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The SDH/SONET Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press E.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA == = S DH/ SONE T C onf igur ati on Setu p = == 10: 11: 42 07/0 7/2 01 1

A -> Sys tem Mo de S etu p


B -> Ove rhe ad Setu p
C -> Cro ss Con nect Cr eat e Se tup
D -> Cro ss Con nect De let e Se tup
E -> ALS /AP SD Setu p
F -> DCC Ch ann el S etu p
G -> Pat h G ran ular ity
H -> MSP AP S C omma nd
J -> Map Ch ang e
K -> Map De let e
L -> Map Co py
M -> SNC P/U PSR APS Co mma nd
N -> Idl e P ath Ala rm Ins erti on Set up
O -> Pat h-p rot ecte d T SA Setu p
P -> Cle ar XCU Port Cr oss Con nec t

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

6.17.2. ALS/APSD Setup Setup Procedure

The ALS/APSD Setup screen will appear. .Use the arrow key to move the cursor. Use the Tab
key to scroll in the settings.

NOTES: Some settings must be typed in.

Table 6-20 ALS/APSD Settings


Field Setting Options Default Setting Notes
Power down OFF, ON OFF
ALS Enable ON, OFF OFF
Pulse Rep Time 60 to 300 300
(seconds)
Manual Restart START, OFF OFF

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


128
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Press the Enter key.

O9400 R -CC4-CHA === ALS/APSD Setup === 14:34:32 05/06/2009


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

XCU2(E) P1 power down : OFF


XCU2(E) P2 power down : OFF
XCU1(W) P1 power down : OFF
XCU1(W) P2 power down : OFF

ALS enable : OFF


pulse repetition time for automatic restart(sec) : 300

XCU2(E) P1 manual restart : OFF


XCU2(E) P2 manual restart : OFF
XCU1(W) P1 manual restart : OFF
XCU1(W) P2 manual restart : OFF

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you are sure. Press Y.

>>Are you sure (Y/N)?

You will be return to the SDH/SONET Configuration Setup Menu. Press the Esc key to return
to the Controller Menu. You must now store the new confiugration. The full menu path for
storing a configuration is as follow:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


129
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.18. DCC Channel Setup


The full menu path for DCC Channel Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
H > SDH/SONET Config Setup
F > DCC channel setup

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.18.1. Setup Screen Access

To setup the DCC Channel, press H from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA = == C ont rol ler Men u = == 16: 37: 43 08/1 0/2 007

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S - > Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L - > Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

The SDH/SONET Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press F.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA = == SDH /SON ET Con figu rat ion Set up === 10 :11 :4 2 07/ 07/ 201 1

A -> Sys tem Mo de S etu p


B -> Ove rhe ad Setu p
C -> Cro ss Con nect Cr eat e Se tup
D -> Cro ss Con nect De let e Se tup
E -> ALS /AP SD Setu p
F -> DCC Ch ann el S etu p
G -> Pat h G ran ular ity
H -> MSP AP S C omma nd
J -> Map Ch ang e
K -> Map De let e
L -> Map Co py
M -> SNC P/U PSR APS Co mma nd
N -> Idl e P ath Ala rm Ins erti on Set up
O -> Pat h-p rot ecte d T SA Setu p
P -> Cle ar XCU Port Cr oss Con nec t

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


130
User’s Manual
O9400-R

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

6.18.2. DCC Channel Setup Procedure

The DCC Channel Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow key to move the cursor.
Use the Tab key to scroll in the settings.

Table 6-21 DCC Channel Settings


DCC Channel Settings
Field Settings
XCU1 DCC1(P1) OFF,
Channels Section DCC (D1-
XCU1 DCC2 Channels D3),
XCU2 DCC1(P1) Line DCC (D4-D12),
Channels Composite (D1-D12)
XCU2 DCC2 Channels
XCU1-DCC2 P2, E1 Inband
XCU2-DCC2

O940 0R -CC4-CHA == = DC C C han nel Set up === 18: 38: 31 08/2 2/2 007
TAB or Ent er k ey to sele ct

XCU1 DC C1( P1) Cha nne ls : Se cti on D CC( D1- D3)


XCU1 DC C2 Chan nel s : Se cti on D CC( D1- D3) X CU1- DCC 2(P 2 )
XCU2 DC C1( P1) Cha nne ls : Se cti on D CC( D1- D3)
XCU2 DC C2 Chan nel s : Se cti on D CC( D1- D3) X CU2- DCC 2(P 2 )

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


131
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The Limitation of turning on and off O9400-R-CC4 E1's inband setting

E1-inband mode cannot be turned on when there is card registrated to Slot


5, 6, 7 and 8. Turning on E1-inband mode will cause a downgrade on
bandwidth: Slot 5 and Slot 6's bandwidth will downgrade from 2 STM1 to 1
STM1, and Slot 7 and Slot 8's bandwidth will downgrade from 4 STM1 to 3
STM1.

After the E1-inband mode is turned on, the user can regiester E1 card
protectied by TPSG on Slot 5 to Slot 8; however, due to the downgrade of
bandwidth, E1 card without protection cannot be registered for the
bandwidth of Slot 5 and 6 can only supported 1 STM1 in this mode.

Turning off E1-inband (switching DCC Channel Settings to P2) with cards
registered on Slot 5 to Slot 8 will trigger an alarm announcing that the
system will need to cold-reset because of the reset of bandwidth.

If the user chooses to proceed, the system will turn off E1-inband, save the
setting and cold-reset. This will cause temporary interruption of data
transmission. The system will simply turn off E1-inband without cold-reset
if there is no card registered on Slot 5 to Slot 8.

If the user is using SNMP to turn off E1-inband, the user will not be
warned of cold-reset.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


132
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.19. Path Granularity Setup


The full menu path for Path Granularity Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
H > SDH/SONET Config Setup
G > Path Granularity

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.19.1. Setup Screen Access

To setup the Path Granularity, press H from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA = == C ont rol ler Men u = == 16: 37: 43 08/1 0/2 007

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S - > Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L - > Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G -> Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y -> Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com m an d == =>

The SDH/SONET Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press G.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA = == SDH /SON ET Con figu rat ion Set up === 10 :11 :42 07/ 07/ 201 1

A -> Sys tem Mo de S etu p


B -> Ove rhe ad Setu p
C -> Cro ss Con nect Cr eat e Se tup
D -> Cro ss Con nect De let e Se tup
E -> ALS /AP SD Setu p
F -> DCC Ch ann el S etu p
G -> Pat h G ran ular ity
H -> MSP AP S C omma nd
J -> Map Ch ang e
K -> Map De let e
L -> Map Co py
M -> SNC P/U PSR APS Co mma nd
N -> Idl e P ath Ala rm Ins erti on Set up
O -> Pat h-p rot ecte d T SA Setu p
P -> Cle ar XCU Port Cr oss Con nec t

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


133
User’s Manual
O9400-R

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

6.19.2. Path Granularity Setup Procedure

The Path Granularity Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow key to move the cursor. Use the
Tab key to scroll in your setting. Setting choices for Port # are: GROUP-1 and GROUP-2.
After selecting your settings press the Enter key.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Path Granularity === 11:50:34 08/13/2007


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

Port# : GROUP-1

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A full Path Granularity screen will appear for the port you selected.
Setting choices are as follows:

Table 6-22 Path Granularity Settings


Path Granularity Settings
Field SDH Settings
HO-Path granularity AU4-TUG3 AU3-3 VC4
SDH TU3, AU3,
LO-Path granularity TU11, TU11, BYPASS
TU12 TU12

Path Granularity Settings


Field SONET Settings
SONET STS3 granularity STS3, STS3C
STS1 granularity VT2, STS1, VT15 BYPASS

NOTES: When the displayed setting for LO-Path/STS1 is BYPASS, no other setting
choices are possible.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


134
User’s Manual
O9400-R

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Path Granularity === 11:44:24 08/28/2007


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

Port# : GROUP-1

============================== XCU1(W)PORT-1 ==============================


AUG1# : 1 2 3 4
HO-Path Granularity : AU4-TUG3 AU4-TUG3 AU4-TUG3 AU4-TUG3
LO-Path#1 Granularity : TU12 TU12 TU12 TU12
LO-Path#2 Granularity : TU12 TU12 TU12 TU12
LO-path#3 Granularity : TU12 TU12 TU12 TU12

============================== XCU2(E)PORT-1 ==============================


AUG1# : 1 2 3 4
HO-Path Granularity : AU4-TUG3 AU4-TUG3 AU4-TUG3 AU4-TUG3
LO-Path#1 Granularity : TU12 TU12 TU12 TU12
LO-Path#2 Granularity : TU12 TU12 TU12 TU12
LO-path#3 Granularity : TU12 TU12 TU12 TU12

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you wish to change the Configuration. Press Y for yes.

>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

Press the Esc key twice to SDH/SONET Configuration Setup Menu. Press the Esc key to return
to the Controller Menu. You must now store the new configuration. The menu path for storing a
configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


135
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.20. MSP APS Command


The full menu path for MSP APS Command setup is as follows:
O > Logon
H > SDH/SONET Config Setup
H > MSP APS Command

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.20.1. Setup Screen Access


To setup MSP APS Command, press H from the Controller Menu.
O940 0R -CC4-CHA === Con tro lle r Me nu === 1 6:37 :43 08 /10/ 200 7

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S - > Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L -> Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X -> Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

The SDH/SONET Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press H.


O940 0R -CC4-CHA == = S DH/ SONE T C on f igur ati on Setu p = == 10: 11: 42 07/0 7/2 011

A -> Sys tem Mo de S etu p


B -> Ove rhe ad Setu p
C -> Cro ss Con nect Cr eat e Se tup
D -> Cro ss Con nect De let e Se tup
E -> ALS /AP SD Setu p
F -> DCC Ch ann el S etu p
G -> Pat h G ran ular ity
H -> MSP AP S C omma nd
J -> Map Ch ang e
K -> Map De let e
L -> Map Co py
M -> SNC P/U PSR APS Co mma nd
N -> Idl e P ath Ala rm Ins erti on Set up
O -> Pat h-p rot ecte d T SA Setu p
P -> Cle ar XCU Port Cr oss Con nec t

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


136
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.20.2. MSP APS Command Setup Procedure


The MSP APS Command Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
each field. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.

NOTES: You must set up the MSP 1+1 mode prior to using the MSP APS command.
Full instructions for MSP 1+1 mode setup can be found in Section 5.11.2,
Mode Setup, in this manual. The MSP1+1 protection must be switched to
ON.

Table 6-23 MSP APS Command Setting Options


Field Setting Options Default Setting Notes
APS Command CLR, CLR Clear
Lockout, Lockout
FS to PRI, Force Switch to Primary
FS to SEC, Force Switch to Secondary
MS to PRI, Manual Switch to Primary
MS to SEC" Manlual Switch to Secondary

O9400R-CC4-CHA === MSP APS Command === 14:28:48 05/06/2009


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

Group1 Member : XCU1-P1 & XCU2-P1


Group2 Member : XCU1-P2 & XCU2-P2

[--- Group1 ---] [--- Group2 ---]


APS Command : FS to PRI disable
Working Line : XCU1(W)

Note :
FS = Force Switch
MS = Manual Switch
PRI = Primary
SEC = Secondary

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes.

>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

You will be returned to the SDH/SONET Configuration Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return
to the Controller Menu. You must now store the new configuration. The menu path for storing a
configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


137
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.21. Map Change


The full menu path for Map Change is as follows:
O > Logon
H > SDH/SONET Config Setup
J > Map Change

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.21.1. Setup Screen Access


To make an Map Change,, press H from the Controller Menu.
O940 0R -CC4-CHA === Co n tro ller Me nu === 16 :37 :43 08/ 10/ 200 7

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S - > Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L - > Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


138
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The SDH/SONET Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press J.


O940 0R -CC4-CHA = == SDH /SON ET Con figu rat ion Set up === 10 :11 :42 07/ 07/ 201 1

A -> Sys tem Mo de S etu p


B -> Ove rhe ad Setu p
C -> Cro ss Con nect Cr eat e Se tup
D -> Cro ss Con nect De let e Se tup
E -> ALS /AP SD Setu p
F -> DCC Ch ann el S etu p
G -> Pat h G ran ular ity
H -> MSP AP S C omma nd
J -> Map Ch ang e
K -> Map De let e
L -> Map Co py
M -> SNC P/U PSR APS Co mma nd
N -> Idl e P ath Ala rm Ins erti on Set up
O -> Pat h-p rot ecte d T SA Setu p
P -> Cle ar XCU Port Cr oss Con nec t

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

6.21.2. Map Change Setup Procedure

The Map Change screen will appear. It lists your currently active map. If you want to change to
the alternate map, press Y for Yes.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === Map Change === 17:55:55 08/23/2007

Current Active Map: map1

Change Current Active Map to map2 (Y/N)?

A prompt will ask if you are sure. Press Y for yes.

>>Ar e y ou sure (Y /N) ?

A prompt will ask you to type in your password. Key it in. Press the Enter key.

==>> En ter pas swo rd :

This procedure is complete. You will be returned to the SDH/SONET Configuration Setup
screen. Press the Esc key to return to the Controller Menu. You must now stor the new
configuration. The full menu path for storing a confiugration is as follows:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


139
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.22. Map Delete


The full menu path for Map Delete Setup is as follows:

O > Logon
H > SDH/SONET Config Setup
K > Map Delete

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.22.1. Setup Screen Access


To setup the Map Delete, press H from the Controller Menu.
O940 0R -CC4-CHA = == C ont rol ler Men u = = = 16: 37: 43 08/1 0/2 007

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S - > Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L - > Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

The SDH/SONET Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press K.


O940 0R -CC4-CHA === SD H/S ONET Co nfi gura tio n S etup == = 10:1 1:4 2 0 7/07 /20 11

A -> Sys tem Mo de S etu p


B -> Ove rhe ad Setu p
C -> Cro ss Con nect Cr eat e Se tup
D -> Cro ss Con nect De let e Se tup
E -> ALS /AP SD Setu p
F -> DCC Ch ann el S etu p
G -> Pat h G ran ular ity
H -> MSP AP S C omma nd
J -> Map Ch ang e
K -> Map De let e
L -> Map Co py
M -> SNC P/U PSR APS Co mma nd
N -> Idl e P ath Ala rm Ins erti on Set up
O -> Pat h-p rot ecte d T SA Setu p
P -> Cle ar XCU Port Cr oss Con nec t

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


140
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.22.2. Map Delete Setup Procedure


The Map Delete screen will appear. Use the arrow key to move the cursor. Use the Tab key to
scroll in your setting. Settings choices are: MAP-1 or MAP-2. After selecting your setting press
the Enter key.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA == = M ap Dele te === 18: 12: 55 08/2 3/2 007


TAB or Ent er k ey to sele ct

Dele te All TSA in MA P- 2

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you are sure. Press Y for yes.

>>Ar e y ou sure (Y /N) ?

A prompt will ask for your password. Key it in. Press the Enter key.

==>> En ter pas swo rd :

A final prompt will tell you that you were successful in deleting the map. .

Map Del ete suc ces s!! !

This procedure is now complete. You will be automatically returned to the SDH/SONET
Configuration Setup screen. Press the Esc key to return to the Controller Menu. You must
now stor the new configuration. The full menu path for storing a confiugration is as follows:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

6.23. Map Copy


The full menu path for Map Copy Setup is as follows:

O > Logon
H > SDH/SONET Config Setup
L > Map Copy

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.23.1. Setup Screen Access

To setup the Map Copy, press H from the Controller Menu.


Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.
141
User’s Manual
O9400-R

O940 0R -CC4-CHA = == C ont rol ler Men u = == 16: 37: 43 08/1 0/2 007

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S - > Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L -> Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

The SDH/SONET Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press L.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA == = S DH/ SONE T C onf igur ati on Setu p = == 10: 11: 42 07/0 7/2 011

A -> Sys tem Mo de S etu p


B -> Ove rhe ad Setu p
C -> Cro ss Con nect Cr eat e Se tup
D -> Cro ss Con nect De let e Se tup
E -> ALS /AP SD Setu p
F -> DCC Ch ann el S etu p
G -> Pat h G ran ular ity
H -> MSP AP S C omma nd
J -> Map Ch ang e
K -> Map De let e
L -> Map Co py
M -> SNC P/U PSR APS Co mma nd
N -> Idl e P ath Ala rm Ins erti on Set up
O -> Pat h-p rot ecte d T SA Setu p
P -> Cle ar XCU Port Cr oss Con nec t

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


142
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.23.2. Map Copy Setup Procedure

The Map Copy screen will appear. Settings choices are: MAP-1 or MAP-2. The sample shown
below: The Active Map setting is map 1. A prompt will ask you “Copy Active Map to map 2
(Y/N)”. Press Y for yes.

O940 0R -CC4-CHA == = M ap C opy == = 20: 27: 20 11/2 8/2 007


TAB or Ent er k ey to sele ct

Copy Ac tiv e Ma p t o t he O the r M ap: map 1- > map2

Copy Ac tiv e Ma p t o m ap2 (Y/ N)?

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you are sure. Press Y for yes.

>>Ar e y ou sure (Y /N) ?

A prompt will ask for your password. Key it in. Press the Enter key.

==>> En ter pas swo rd :

A final prompt will tell you that you were successful in copy the map. .

Map Cop y s ucce ss! !!

This procedure is now complete. You will be automatically returned to the SDH/SONET
Configuration Setup screen. Press the Esc key to return to the Controller Menu. You must
now stor the new configuration. The full menu path for storing a confiugration is as follows:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


143
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.24. SNCP/UPSR APS Command


The full menu path for SNCP/UPSR APS Command Setup is as follows:

O > Logon
H > SDH/SONET Config Setup
M > SNCP/UPSR APS Command

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.24.1. Setup Screen Access


To setup the SNCP/UPSR APS Command, press H from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === Co ntr olle r M enu === 1 6:3 7:4 3 08 /10 /20 07

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S - > Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M -> Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L - > Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R -> Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z -> Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

The SDH/SONET Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press M.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === SD H/SO NET Co nfig ura tio n Se tup == = 1 0:1 1:4 2 07 /07 /20 11

A -> Sys tem Mo de S etu p


B -> Ove rhe ad Setu p
C -> Cro ss Con nect Cr eat e Se tup
D -> Cro ss Con nect De let e Se tup
E -> ALS /AP SD Setu p
F -> DCC Ch ann el S etu p
G -> Pat h G ran ular ity
H -> MSP AP S C omma nd
J -> Map Ch ang e
K -> Map De let e
L -> Map Co py
M -> SNC P/U PSR APS Co mma nd
N -> Idl e P ath Ala rm Ins erti on Set up
O -> Pat h- p rot ecte d T SA Setu p
P -> Cle ar XCU Port Cr oss Con nec t

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


144
User’s Manual
O9400-R

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

The SNCP/UPSR APS Setup screen will appear.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === SNCP/UPSR APS Setup === 14:47:00 06/08/2016

A -> SNCP/UPSR APS Command


B -> SNCP/UPSR Revertive Setup
C -> SNCP/UPSR AIS Insert Setup
D -> SNCP/UPSR WTR Setup
E -> SNCP/UPSR UNEQP Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

6.24.2. SNCP/UPSR APS Command Procedure

Press A to access the SNCP/UPSR APS Command screen.

The SNCP/UPSR APS Command screen will appear. SNCP/UPSR is an acronym for Sub-
Network Connection Protection. APS is an acronym for Automatic Protection Switching. Use
the arrow key to move the cursor. Use the Tab key to scroll in settings.

NOTES: Some settings must be typed in.

Table 6-24 SDH/SONET SNCP/UPSR APS Command


SDH/SONET SNCP/UPSR APS Command
Field SDH Settings SONET Settings
Line Side XCU1(W) or XCU2(E)
Port 1 to 2
AUG1# 1 to 4 -
VC3/TUG-3# 1 to 3 -
VC1x# 1 to 21 for VC12, 1 to 28 for -
VC11
STS3# - 1 to 4
STS1# - 1 to 3
VTx# - 1 to 21 for VT2, 1 to 28 for VT15
Command Clear, FS to PRI., FS to SEC., MS to PRI., MS to SEC.,
Lockout of protection

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


145
User’s Manual
O9400-R

After entering your settings press the Enter key.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === SNC P/U PSR APS Co mma nd = == 18: 40: 22 0 8/2 3/2 007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

Line Si de : XC U1( W)
Port : 1
AUG1 # : 1
VC3/ TUG 3# : 1
VC1x # : 01

Comm and : Cl ear

Note :
FS = Fo rce Sw itch
MS = Ma nua l S witc h

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you are sure. Press Y for yes.


>>Ar e y ou sure (Y /N) ?

Press the Esc key to the SDH/SONET Configuration Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return
to the Controller Menu. You must now store the new configuration. The menu path for storing a
configuration:
V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

6.24.3. SNCP/UPSR Revertive Setup

Press B to access the SNCP/UPSR Revertive Setup screen. Type in your settings. Press the
Enter key.

O9400R-CC4 - CHA === SNCP/UPSR Revertive Setup === 10:35:20 07/07/2011


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

Slot : XCU1(W)
Port : 1
AUG1 : 1
VC3/TUG3 : 1
VC1x : 01
Revertive: Non-Revertive

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


146
User’s Manual
O9400-R

SDH/SONET SNCP/UPSR Revertive Setup


Field SDH Settings SONET Settings
Slot XCU1(W) or XCU2(E)
Port 1 to 2
AUG1# 1 to 4 -
VC3/TUG-3# 1 to 3 -
VC1x# 1 to 21 for VC12, 1 to 28 for -
VC11
STS3# - 1 to 4
STS1# - 1 to 3
VTx# - 1 to 21 for VT2, 1 to 28 for VT15
Revertive Revertive, Non-Revertive

6.24.4. SNCP/UPSR AIS Insert Setup


Press C to access the SNCP/UPSR AIS Insert Setup screen. It is used for enabling the AIS
insertion for SNCP/UPSR protected path.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === SNCP/UPSR AIS Insert Setup === 10:27:19 07/01/2015


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

SNCP/UPSR AIS Insertion : ENABLED

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Key or scroll in your settings. Press enter.


A prompt will ask if you are sure. Press Y for yes.
>>Are you sure (Y/N)?

SDH/SONET SNCP/UPSR APS Command


Field SDH Settings SONET Settings
SNCP/UPSR AIS Enable, Disable
Insertion

Figure 6-3 shows a basic SNCP ring configuration. Under normal condition, the traffic from A to
B and from B to A are both going through the primary path.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


147
User’s Manual
O9400-R

B A A B

Secondary Path
(B A)

Node A
Primary Path
(B A)

Secondary Path
(A B)
Node B

Primary Path
(A B)

B A A B

Figure 6-3 SNCP/UPSR Ring (normal)

When a line break occurs on the primary traffic path (AB), the path selector inside node B will
switch to the secondary path. If AIS insertion is not enabled, node A will still select the primary
traffic path (BA). In this case the traffic from A to B and from B to A are giong through
different routes, as shown in Figure 6-4.

B A A B

Secondary Path
(B A)

Node A
Primary Path
(B A)

Secondary Path
(A B)
Node B

Primary Path
(A B)

B A A B

Figure 6-4 SNCP/UPSR Ring (line break), without AIS Insertion Enabled

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


148
User’s Manual
O9400-R

If AIS insertion is enabled, once node B switches to the secondary path it will send AIS to node
A once through the primary traffic path (BA), as shown in Figure 6-5. In this case both node A
and node B switch the traffic path to the secondary path.

B A A B
Receive AIS, switch to
secondary path

Secondary Path
(B A)

Node A
Primary Path
(B A)

Secondary Path
(A B) Send AIS
one time
Node B

Primary Path
(A B)

B A A B

Figure 6-5 SNCP/UPSR Ring (line break), with AIS Insertion Enabled

6.24.5. SNCP/UPSR WTR Setup


Press D to access the SNCP/UPSR WTR Setup screen.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === SNCP/UPSR WTR Setup === 14:51:14 06/08/2016


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 1~60, BACKSPACE to edit

WTR for SNCP/UPSR Revertive : 06 (x10 seconds)

Note: The deviation of WTR is 10 seconds.

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Key your settings (number 1~60). Press the Enter key.


A prompt will ask if you are sure. Press Y for yes.
>>Are you sure (Y/N)?

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


149
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.24.6. SNCP/UPSR UNEQP Setup

Press E to access the SNCP/UPSR UNEQP Setup screen.


O9400R-CC4-CHA === SNCP/UPSR UNEQP Setup === 14:52:28 06/08/2016
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

SNCP switch on UNEQP : DISABLED

Note: The setting is applicable for Non-Intrusive mode only.

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Key or scroll in your settings. Press enter.


A prompt will ask if you are sure. Press Y for yes.
>>Are you sure (Y/N)?

Field Setting Options Default


SNCP switch Disabled, Enabled Disabled
on UNEQP

NOTES: The full menu path to setup Non-Intrusive mode is as follows:

H > SDH/SONET Config Setup


A > System Mode Setup

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


150
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The System Mode Setup screen will appear. Use tab to scroll in your settings.

O9400R-CC4-CHA === System Mode Setup === 16:42:46 06/08/2016


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
SDH/SONET Mode : SDH MSP WTR Timer : 300 seconds
Group1 Member : XCU1-P1 & XCU2-P1 SNCP/UPSR Mode : Intrusive
Group2 Member : XCU1-P2 & XCU2-P2
================== Aggregate Line Protection Switch Group1 ==================
Mode : NP
XCU1-P1 Rate : STM4 XCU2-P1 Rate : STM4

[MSP1+1]
Protection: ----
Revertive : ----
Direction : ----

================== Aggregate Line Protection Switch Group2 ==================


Mode : NP
XCU1-P2 Rate : STM4 XCU2-P2 Rate : STM4

[MSP1+1]
Protection: ----
Revertive : ----
Direction : ----

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

6.25. Idle Path Alarm Insertion Setup


The full menu path for Idle Path Alarm Insertion Setup is as follows:

O > Logon
H > SDH/SONET Config Setup
N > Idle Path Alarm Insertion Setup

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


151
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.25.1. Setup Screen Access


To setup the Idle Path Alarm Insertion Setup, press H from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === Co ntr olle r M enu === 1 6:3 7:4 3 08 /10 /20 07

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S - > Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L - > Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N -> Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X -> Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

The SDH/SONET Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press N.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === SD H/SO NET Co nfig ura tio n Se tup == = 1 0:1 1:4 2 07 /07 /20 11

A -> Sys tem Mo de S etu p


B -> Ove rhe ad Setu p
C -> Cro ss Con nect Cr eat e Se tup
D -> Cro ss Con nect De let e Se tup
E -> ALS /AP SD Setu p
F -> DCC Ch ann el S etu p
G -> Pat h G ran ular ity
H -> MSP AP S C omma nd
J -> Map Ch ang e
K -> Map De let e
L -> Map Co py
M -> SNC P/U PSR APS Co mma nd
N -> Idl e P ath Ala rm Ins erti on Set up
O -> Pat h-p rot ecte d T SA Setu p
P -> Cle ar XCU Port Cr oss Con nec t

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


152
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.25.2. Idle Path Alarm Insertion Setup Procedure

The Idle Path Alarm Insertion Setup screen will appear. Idle Path Alarm Insertion Setup allow
user to set up an alarm when cross connect is not activate. Use the Tab key to scroll in settings.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === Idl e Pa th Ala rm I nse rti on S etu p== = 1 0:3 6:2 4 10 /22 /20 09
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

Alar m i nse rted fo r i dle pat h(w itho ut XC) : H P- U NEQ /LP- UNE Q

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

Table 6-25 Idle Path Alarm Insertion Setup


Idle Path Alarm Insertion Setup
Field Setting Option
Alarm inserted for HP-UNEQ/LP-UNEQ, AU-AIS/TU-AIS
idle path (without
XC)

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


153
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.26. Path-protected TSA (Time Slot


Assignment) Setup
The full menu path for Path-protected TSA Setup is as follows:

O > Logon
H > SDH/SONET Config Setup
O > Path-protected TSA Setup

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.26.1. Setup Screen Access


To setup the Path-protected TSA Setup, press H from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === Co ntr olle r M enu === 1 6:3 7:4 3 08 /10 /20 07

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S - > Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L - > Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N -> Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


154
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The SDH/SONET Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press O.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === SD H/SO NET Co nfig ura tio n Se tup = = = 1 0:1 1:4 2 07 /07 /20 11

A -> Sys tem Mo de S etu p


B -> Ove rhe ad Setu p
C -> Cro ss Con nect Cr eat e Se tup
D -> Cro ss Con nect De let e Se tup
E -> ALS /AP SD Setu p
F -> DCC Ch ann el S etu p
G -> Pat h G ran ular ity
H -> MSP AP S C omma nd
J -> Map Ch ang e
K -> Map De let e
L -> Map Co py
M -> SNC P/U PSR APS Co mma nd
N -> Idl e P ath Ala rm Ins erti on Set up
O -> Pat h-p rot ecte d T SA Setu p
P -> Cle ar XCU Port Cr oss Con nec t

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

The Path-protected TSA (Time Slot Assignment) Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow key
to place the asterisk (*) beside the map you will use to set up the TSA. Press the Enter key.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === Pat h -p rot ecte d T SA Setu p = == 1 0:1 2:3 7 07 /07 /20 11

>> S ele ct Map ? * MAP -1 MAP -2

Field Setting Options Default Setting Notes


Select Map MAP-1, MAP-2 NULL

An expanded setup screen will appear. This screen is used to set up P.P.A.D. (Path-protected
ADD & DROP) between Primary TP (Termination Point), Secondary TP, and Protected TP.
The relationship between the three is shown in the figure below.

NOTES: P.P.A.D is used for Ring topology with SNCP protection

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


155
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Primary Secondary
TP TP

Protected TP

There are seven steps to set up P.P.A.D:

1. Select map-1 or map-2


2. Select granularity
3. Select Primary TP (choose slot, port, channel, etc. just as you would when setting up a
cross-connect.
4. Select Secondary TP (slot, port, channel, etc.)
5. Select Protected TP (slot, port, channel, etc.)
6. Select channel count
7. Press the Enter key

NOTES: The bottom region of the Path-protected TSA Setup screen displays
PrimaryTP / Secondary TP/ Protected TP slot channel status. In our sample
screen below, xxxxxxxxxx is shown.

VC3/TUG3 VC1x : xxxxxxxxxxx -> XCU1(W) Port#1 AUG1#1 Timeslot Available


#1 01 to 21 : o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
#2 01 to 21 : o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
#3 01 to 21 : o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
xxxxxxxxxxx can be Primary TP, Secondary TP or Protected TP. It depends on the cursor
position. (Cursor is moved by the arrow keys.)

Normally, the bottom region of the screen will display the Protected TP channel status.

When the cursor is placed over the Primary TP parameter selection area of the setup screen,
the bottom region of the screen will display the Primary TP channel status.

When the cursor is placed over the Secondary TP parameter selection area of the setup screen,
the bottom region of the screen will display the Secondary TP channel status.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


156
User’s Manual
O9400-R

‘o’ means that a timeslot is free for setting up a TSA


’x’ means that a Xc (cross-conect) already exists on that timeslot
‘-‘ means that the granularity is mismatched

6.27. Clear XCU Port Cross Connect


The full menu path for Path-protected TSA Setup is as follows:

O > Logon
H > SDH/SONET Config Setup
P > Clear XCU Port Cross Connect

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.27.1. Setup Screen Access

To setup the Clear XCU Port Cross Connect, press H from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === Co ntr olle r M enu === 1 6:3 7:4 3 08 /10 /20 07

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S - > Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L -> Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X -> Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


157
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The SDH/SONET Configuration Setup menu will appear. Press P.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === SD H/SO NET C o nfig ura tio n Se tup == = 1 0:1 1:4 2 07 /07 /20 11

A -> Sys tem Mo de S etu p


B -> Ove rhe ad Setu p
C -> Cro ss Con nect Cr eat e Se tup
D -> Cro ss Con nect De let e Se tup
E -> ALS /AP SD Setu p
F -> DCC Ch ann el S etu p
G -> Pat h G ran ular ity
H -> MSP AP S C omma nd
J -> Map Ch ang e
K -> Map De let e
L -> Map Co py
M -> SNC P/U PSR APS Co mma nd
N -> Idl e P ath Ala rm Ins erti on Set up
O -> Pat h- p rot ecte d T SA Setu p
P -> Cle ar XCU Port Cr oss Con nec t

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

The Clear XCU Port Cross Connect screen will appear. Type in your setting. Press the Enter
key.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA == = C lear XCU P o rt C ros s C onne ct === 17 :08 :37 07/ 19/ 201 1
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

Clea r a ll cros s c onn ect rel ate d to XC U1( W) P ORT #1

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

Field Setting Options


Clear all cross connect related to XCU1(W) PORT#1, XCU1(W) PORT#2,
XCU2(E) PORT#1, XCU2(E) PORT#2

A prompt will ask if you are sure. Press Y for yes.

>>Are you sure (Y/N)?

>>Clear Success!!!

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


158
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.28. Alarm Setup


There are nine different types of alarm setup screens for the Loop-O9400R.

6.28.1. Setup Screen Access


The initial menu path for Alarm Setup is:

O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup

From that point, the path to setup a specific alarm will be one of the following:
A -> System Alarm Setup I
B -> System Alarm Setup II
C -> Line Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
D -> HO-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
E -> LO-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
F -> SDH/SONET Alarm Severity Setup
G -> External Alarm Setup
H -> SD/SF Threshold Setup
I -> Insert AIS Alarm Setup
J -> Alarm Output Setup

To set up an alarm, press M from the Controller Menu.

O9400R-CC4 - CHA === Controller Menu === 13:49:34 08/09/2007

Serial Number : 010525 Device Name : O9400R


Hardware Version: D Start Time : 12:41:25 08/09/2007
Software Version: V1.01.01 07/24/2007 Connect Port : SUPV_PORT
FPGA Version : V1 XCU Protection: Redundant Ready
[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> System Config Display S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Display H -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
I -> System Information M -> Alarm Setup
Q -> Alarm Queue L -> File Transfer
B -> Currently-Active Alarm Summary V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
A -> Current Alarm Status G -> Loopback/Diagnostics Setup
P -> SDH/SONET Performance R -> Performance Setup/Clear
T -> System Log N -> Unit Registration
E -> Diagnostics Display

[LOG] [MISC]
F -> Log Off Y -> Alarm Cut Off
O -> Log On Z -> Reset
U -> Choose a Trib Unit X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


159
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The Alarm Setup screen will appear. Press the appropriate letter to select the setup screen you require.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === Al arm Set up === 11: 05: 24 1 0/2 2/2 009

A -> Sys tem Al arm Set up I


B -> Sys tem Al arm Set up II
C -> Lin e A lar m Ma sk/ Rel ay S etu p
D -> HO- Pat h/S TS- P ath Al arm Mas k/R elay Se tup
E -> LO- Pat h/V T- Pa th Ala rm M ask /Re lay Set up
F -> SDH /SO NET Ala rm Sev erit y S etu p
G -> Ext ern al( Envi ron men t) A lar m S etup
H -> SD/ SF Thr esho ld Set up
I -> Ins ert AI S Al arm Se tup
J -> Ala rm Out put Set up

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

6.28.2. System Alarm Setup I


The full menu path for System Alarm Setup I is:

O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
A > System Alarm Setup I

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor. Use the Tab key to scroll in your setting for the Overall
Alarm and Overall Relay fields at the top of the screen.
Setting choices are: ENABLED or DISABLED

Setting choices for the rest of the screen are detailed in the table below. It is up to the
customer to determine which alarm he/she considers to be minor, major, critical or informative.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


160
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Table 6-26 System Alarm Setup I Settings


System Alarm Setup I Settings
Field Alarm Relay Severity
Settings Settings Settings
Alm Cut Off
Power Loss/Uneqp
Fan Fail
Fan Module Uneqp
RBC Uneqp
Overheat
Ts Sync Loss ENABLED ENABLED MINR
Logon and Logoff or or MAJR
Optical port Uneqp DISABLED DISABLED INFO
Card In CRIT
Card Out
Card Type Mismatch
Card Port Number
Mismatch
Card Fail
Card Registration

Press the Enter key after inputting your settings.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA = == S yst em Alar m S etu p I === 1 0:2 5:1 6 08 /10 /20 07
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS
Ove ral l A larm :E NAB LED Ove ral l Re lay :D ISAB LED
typ e alar m rel ay se ver ity
Alm Cu t O ff ENAB LED DIS ABL ED IN FO
Pow er OFF /Une qp ENAB LED DIS ABL ED MA JR
Fan Fa il ENAB LED DIS ABL ED MA JR
Fan Mo dul e Un eqp ENAB LED DIS ABL ED MI NR
RBC Un eqp ENAB LED DIS ABL ED IN FO
Ove rhe at ENAB LED DIS ABL ED MA JR
Ts Syn c L oss ENAB LED DIS ABL ED IN FO
Log on and Log off ENAB LED DIS ABL ED IN FO
Opt ica l p ort Une qp ENAB LED DIS ABL ED CR IT
Car d I n ENAB LED DIS ABL ED MA JR
Car d O ut ENAB LED DIS ABL ED MA JR
Car d T ype Mis mat ch ENAB LED DIS ABL ED MA JR
Car d P ort Num ber Mi smat ch ENAB LED DIS ABL ED MA JR
Car d F ail ENAB LED DIS ABL ED MA JR
Car d R egi stra tio n ENAB LED DIS ABL ED MA JR

(CRI T:C RIT ICAL , M AJR :MAJ OR, MI NR:M INO R, INFO :IN FOR M)

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you wish to change the Configuration. Press Y for yes.

>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

You will be returned to the Alarm Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to the Controller
Menu. You must now store the new configuration. The menu path for storing a configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


161
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.28.3. System Alarm Setup II


The full menu path for System Alarm Setup II is:

O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
B > System Alarm Setup II

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor. Use the Tab key to scroll in your setting. Setting
choices are detailed in the tables below. It is up to the customer to determine which alarm
he/she considers to be minor, major, critical or informative.

Table 6-27 System Alarm Setup II Settings


System Alarm Setup II Settings
Field Alarm Relay Settings Severity
Settings
SNCP/UPSR Switch
MSP Switch
Trib Protection SYNC
Standby Controller Card ENABLED ENABLED MINR
Takeover or or MAJR
Standby Trib Takeover DISABLED DISABLED INFO
Controller Card SYNC CRIT
SFP Tx Fail
SFP Rx Fail
SFP Temperature

NOTES: The Alarm for SFP TX Fail, SFP RX Fail, and SFP Temperature are only available for
SFP module with DDM function.

Press the Enter key after inputting your settings.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA == = Sy ste m A larm Se tup II === 1 0:0 6:4 7 08 /10 /20 07
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

typ e alar m rel ay se ver ity


SNC P/U PSR Swi tch EN ABL ED D ISA BLED MAJ R
MSP Sw itc h ENAB LED DIS ABL ED MA JR
Tri b P rot ecti on SYN C ENAB LED DIS ABL ED IN FO
Sta ndb y X CU T ake ove r ENAB LED DIS ABL ED MA JR
Sta ndb y T rib Tak eov er ENAB LED DIS ABL ED MA JR
XCU SY NC ENAB LED DIS ABL ED IN FO
Opt ica l T x Fa il ENAB LED DIS ABL ED IN FO

(CRI T:C RIT ICAL , M AJR :MAJ OR, MI NR:M INO R, INFO :IN FOR M)

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you wish to change the Configuration. Press Y for yes.

>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

You will be returned to the Alarm Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to the Controller
Menu. You must now store the new configuration. The menu path for storing a configuration:
V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


162
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.28.4. Line Alarm Mask/Relay Setup


The full menu path for Line Alarm Mask/Relay Setup is:

O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
C > Line Alarm Mask/Relay Setup

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings.

Table 6-28 Line Alarm Mask/Relay Settings


Line Alarm Mask/Relay Settings
Field Settings
Line Side XCU1(W), XCU2(E)
Aggregate Port 1, Port 2
Line

Press the Enter key after inputting your settings.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA == = L ine Ala rm Mask /Re lay Set up === 1 0:1 3:4 7 08 /10 /20 07
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS
Line Si de : XC U1( W) Aggr ega te line : Por t- 1

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

An expanded screen will appear. Scroll in the settings for each Alarm and Relay type. The
settings are ENABLED or DISABLED. Press the Enter key.

O9400R-CC4 - CHA === Line Alarm Mask/Relay Setup === 10:47:17 11/20/2007
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Line Side : XCU1(W) Aggregate line : Port-1

Type Alarm Relay

PI-LOS ENABLED DISABLED


RS-LOF ENABLED DISABLED
RS-TIM DISABLED DISABLED
MS-SD DISABLED DISABLED
MS-SF DISABLED DISABLED
MS-AIS ENABLED DISABLED
MS-RDI DISABLED DISABLED
MS-REI DISABLED DISABLED
B1-BIP DISABLED DISABLED
B2-BIP DISABLED DISABLED

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you wish to change the Configuration. Press Y for yes.

>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

You will be returned to the Alarm Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to the Controller
Menu. You must now store the new configuration. The menu path for storing a configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config


Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.
163
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.28.5. HO-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup


The full menu path for HO-Path/STS- Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup is:

O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
D > HO-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor. Use the Tab key to scroll in the line settings.

NOTES: Some settings must be typed in.

Table 6-29 HO-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Settings


HO-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Settings
Field Settings
Line Side XCU1(W), XCU2(E)
Aggregate Line Port 1, Port 2
SDH AUG#1 1 to 4
SONET STS#3 1 to 4

Press the Enter key after inputting your settings.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === HO -Pa th/S TS - Pat h Al arm Ma sk/R ela y = == 1 1:1 0:0 3 10 /22 /20 09
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS
Line Si de : XC U1( W) Aggr ega te line : Por t- 1
AUG1 # : 1

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

An expanded screen will appear. Scroll in the settings for each Alarm and Relay type. The
settings are ENABLED or DISABLED Press the Enter key.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === HO -Pa th/S TS - Pat h Al arm Ma sk/R ela y = == 1 1:1 0:3 9 10 /22 /20 09
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS
Line Si de : XC U1( W) Aggr ega te line : Por t- 1
AUG1 # : 1

Ty pe A lar m Re lay

AU -LO P E NAB LED DI SAB LED


AU -AI S E NAB LED DI SAB LED
HP -SD E NAB LED DI SAB LED
HP -SF E NAB LED DI SAB LED
HP -UN EQ E NAB LED DI SAB LED
HP -PL M E NAB LED DI SAB LED
HP -TI M E NAB LED DI SAB LED
HP -RD I- P E NAB LED DI SAB LED
HP -RD I- S E NAB LED DI SAB LED
HP -RD I- C E NAB LED DI SAB LED
HP -LO M E NAB LED DI SAB LED
HP -RE I E NAB LED DI SAB LED
HP -B3 -BI P E NAB LED DI SAB LED

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


164
User’s Manual
O9400-R

A prompt will ask if you wish to change the Configuration. Press Y for yes.

>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

You will be returned to the Alarm Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to the Controller
Menu. You must now store the new configuration. The menu path for storing a configuration:
V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

6.28.6. LO-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup


The full menu path for LO-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup is:

O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
E > LO-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor. Use the Tab key to scroll in the line settings.

NOTES: Some settings must be typed in.

Table 6-30 LO-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Settings


LO-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Settings
Mode Field Settings
SDH Line Side XCU1(W), XCU2(E)
SONET Aggregate Line Port 1, Port 2

SDH AUG1# 1 to 4
VC3/TUG3# 1 to 3
TU12# TU11# 1 to 21* 1 to 28

SONET STS3# 1 to 4
STS1# 1 to 3
VT2# VT15# 1 to 21* 1 to 28

NOTES: These settings depend on the setting in Path Granularity Setup. Please refer
to Section 6.17.1.

Press the Enter key after inputting your settings.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA == = L O-P ath/ VT- Pat h Al arm Ma sk/R ela y = == 1 1:2 0:1 6 10 /22 /20 09
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS
Line Si de : XC U1( W) Aggr ega te line : Por t- 1
AUG1 # : 1

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


165
User’s Manual
O9400-R

An expanded screen will appear. Scroll in the settings for each Alarm and Relay type. The
settings are ENABLED or DISABLED. To copy the config to another channel, type in the ‘from’
and ‘to’ channel numbers (range is 1 to 21) .Press the Enter key.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA == = L O-P ath/ VT- Pat h Al arm Ma sk/R ela y = == 1 1:2 1:3 9 10 /22 /20 09
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS
Line Si de : XC U1( W) Aggr ega te line : Por t- 1
AUG1 # : 1 VC3/ TUG 3# : 1
TU12 # : 01 (1 ,1, 1)
Ty pe A lar m Re lay

TU -LO P E NAB LED DI SAB LED


TU -AI S E NAB LED DI SAB LED
LP -SD E NAB LED DI SAB LED
LP -SF E NAB LED DI SAB LED
LP -UN EQ E NAB LED DI SAB LED
LP -PL M E NAB LED DI SAB LED
LP -TI M E NAB LED DI SAB LED
LP -RD I- P E NAB LED DI SAB LED
LP -RD I- S E NAB LED DI SAB LED
LP -RD I- C E NAB LED DI SAB LED
LP -V5 -RE I E NAB LED DI SAB LED
LP -V5 -BI P E NAB LED DI SAB LED

Co py the sam e c onf ig. fro m T U12# 01 to TU12 #01

<< P res s E SC k e y to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you wish to change the Configuration. Press Y for yes.

>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

You will be returned to the Alarm Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to the Controller
Menu. You must now store the new configuration. The menu path for storing a configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


166
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.28.7. SDH/SONET Alarm Severity Setup


The full menu path for SDH/SONET Alarm Severity Setup is:

O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
F > SDH/SONET Alarm Severity Setup

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor. Use the Tab key to scroll in the Severity settings.
Setting choices are: MINR, MAJR, CRIT and INFO.

Press the Enter key after inputting your settings.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === SD H/SO NET Al arm Sev eri ty S etu p = == 1 1:0 3:0 4 08 /10 /20 07
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

Li ne Sev eri ty S TS Path Se veri ty VT Pa th S eve rit y


-- --- --- ---- --- --- --- --- ---- --- --- ---- --- - -- --- --- ---- --- --- ---
LO S- P I C RIT LOP -P MA JR LO P- V M AJR
LO F- S C RIT AIS -P MA JR AI S- V M AJR
TI M- S M INR SD- P MI NR SD -V M INR
SD -L M INR SF- P MI NR SF -V M INR
SF -L M INR UNE Q- P MI NR UN EQ- V M INR
AI S- L M AJR PLM -P MI NR PL M- V M INR
RD I- L M INR TIM -P MI NR TI M- V M INR
RE I- L M INR RDI -P-P MI NR RD I- P -V M INR
B1 -BI P M INR RDI -S-P MI NR RD I- S -V M INR
B2 -BI P M INR RDI -C-P MI NR RD I- C -V M INR
LOM -P MA JR RE I- V M INR
REI -P MI NR BI P- V M INR
B3- BIP- P MI NR

(CRI T:C RIT ICAL , M AJR :MAJ OR, MI NR:M INO R, INFO :IN FOR M)

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you wish to change the Configuration. Press Y for yes.

>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

You will be returned to the Alarm Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to the Controller
Menu. You must now store the new configuration. The menu path for storing a configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


167
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.28.8. External Alarm Setup


The full menu path for External Alarm Setup is:

O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
G > External Alarm Setup

There are four external alarms on this screen. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor. Use the
Tab key to scroll in your alarm, relay and severity settings.

Setting choices are illustrated in the table below.

Table 6-31 External Alarm Settings


External Alarm Settings
Field Alarm Relay Severity Message
External MINR User can type in
ENABLED ENABLED MAJR
Alarm1 or or INFO
dEscriptive
External DISABLED DISABLED CRIT messages which
Alarm2 will be shown in
External Alarm Queue and
Alarm3 SNMPc trap.
External
Alarm4

Press the Enter key after inputting your settings.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA == = E xte rnal (En vir onme nt) Al arm Set up ===1 1:0 5:1 1 08 /10 /20 07
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

Type A lar m Re lay Sev eri ty Mes sag e


Exte rna l A larm 1 E NAB LED DI SAB LED MAJ R ext ern al a lar m1
Exte rna l A larm 2 E NAB LED DI SAB LED MAJ R ext ern al a lar m2
Exte rna l A larm 3 E NAB LED DI SAB LED MAJ R ext ern al a lar m3
Exte rna l A larm 4 E NAB LED DI SAB LED MAJ R ext ern al a lar m4

(CRI T:C RIT ICAL , M AJR :MAJ OR, MI NR:M INO R, INFO :IN FOR M)

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you wish to change the Configuration. Press Y for yes.

>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

You will be returned to the Alarm Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to the Controller
Menu. You must now store the new configuration. The menu path for storing a configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


168
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.28.9. SD/SF Threshold Setup


The full menu path for SD/SF threshold Setup is:

O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
H > SD/SF Threshold Setup

There six alarm types on this screen.

The setting choices available are:

Table 6-32 SD/SF Threshold Settings


SD/SF Threshold Settings
Alarm Type Threshold Settings
SD-L 1E3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or 11
SF-L 1E3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or 11
SD-P 1E4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or 11
SF-P 1E4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or 11
SD-V 1E3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or 11
SF-V 1E3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or 11

NOTES: Threshold settings are easily converted to the BER (Bit Error Rate). See
additional table below.

Table 6-33 Threshold Setting to Bit Error Rate Conversion


Threshold Setting to Bit Error Rate
Conversion
Threshold Bit Error Rate
Setting
3 10-3 (.001)
4 10-4 (.0001)
5 10-5 (.00001)
6 10-6 (.000001)
7 10-7 (.0000001)
8 10-8 (.00000001)
9 10-9 (.000000001)
10 10-10 (.0000000001)
11 10-11 (.00000000001)

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


169
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor. Use the Tab key to scroll in the settings.
Press the Enter key after inputting your settings.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA == = SD /SF Th resh old Se tup === 1 1:1 1:2 5 08 /10 /20 07
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

Ty pe T hre shol d
-- --- --- -- - --- ---- --
SD -L 1 E- 4
SF -L 1 E- 3
SD -P 1 E- 5
SF -P 1 E- 4
SD -V 1 E- 4
SF -V 1 E- 3

A prompt will ask if you wish to change the Configuration. Press Y for yes.

>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

You will be returned to the Alarm Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to the Controller
Menu. You must now store the new configuration. The menu path for storing a configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

6.28.10. Insert AIS Alarm Setup


The full menu path for Insert AIS Alarm Setup is:

O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
I > Insert AIS Alarm Setup

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor. Use the Tab key to scroll in the line settings. Setting
choices are ENABLE or DISABLE.

Press the Enter key after inputting your settings.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA == = In ser t A IS A lar m S etup == = 1 1:0 2:2 0 10 /22 /20 09
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

T ype A larm
- --- --- ---- -- - ---- ---
R S -T IM to A IS : E NABL E
M S -A IS to A IS : E NABL E
A U -L OP to A IS : E NABL E
A U -A IS to A IS : E NABL E
HP -UN EQ to A IS : E NABL E
H P -T IM to A IS : E NABL E
H P -L OM to A IS : E NABL E
H P -P LM to A IS : E NABL E
T U -L OP to A IS : E NABL E
T U -A IS to A IS : E NABL E
LP -UN EQ to A IS : E NABL E

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>


Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.
170
User’s Manual
O9400-R

A prompt will ask if you wish to change the Configuration. Press Y for yes.

>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

You will be returned to the Alarm Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to the Controller
Menu. You must now store the new configuration. The menu path for storing a configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

6.28.11. AIarm Output Setup


The function called alarm output setup is used to control the Alarm Output Connector for two
purposes.

· One is by system, under Alarm Interface Sercion (3.2), there has a table definition of Pin-
out Alarm Output Connector which 4 ports for critical, major, minor, and informative alarm
status.
· One is by user, under VT-100 menu tree, user can set the 4 ports either Open or Close
and there has 63 characters for customer to define the port info.

The full menu path for Alarm Output Setup is:

O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
J > Alarm Output Setup

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor. Use the Tab key to scroll in the line settings.

Press the Enter key after inputting your settings.

O940 0R - XCU 16 = == Alar m O utp ut S etu p = == 0 9:34 :59 10 /04/ 201 1


ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

alar m o utp ut c ont rol : by user

[s tat e] [in fo]


P1: OPEN vwxyz0123456789\
P2: OPEN 9999
P3: OPEN XYZab0123456789+
P4: OPEN 5479

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

Field Setting Options Default


Alarm Output Control User, System System
State (P1 to P4) Open, Close Only function when the Alarm
Output Control set to by user
Info Maximum 63 characters
(ASCII character code)
Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.
171
User’s Manual
O9400-R

A prompt will ask if you wish to change the Configuration. Press Y for yes.

>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

You will be returned to the Alarm Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to the Controller
Menu. You must now store the new configuration. The menu path for storing a configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

6.28.12. Inhibit Port Alarm Setup


The function allows the user to disable the alarm per port for XCU or B16 card.

The full menu path for Inhibit Port Alarm Setup is:

O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
K > Inhibit Port Alarm Setup

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor. Use the Tab key to scroll in the line settings.

Press the Enter key after inputting your settings.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA = == Inh ibit Po rt Alar m S etu p == = 1 5:15 :26 05 /11/ 201 7
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

UNI T Po rt 1 Po rt 2
--- --- -- --- --- -- --- --- --
XCU 1(W ) DIS ABL ED DIS ABL ED
XCU 2(E ) DIS ABL ED DIS ABL ED
Tri b1 DIS ABL ED DIS ABL ED
Tri b2 DIS ABL ED DIS ABL ED
Tri b3 DIS ABL ED DIS ABL ED
Tri b4 DIS ABL ED DIS ABL ED
Tri b5 DIS ABL ED DIS ABL ED
Tri b6 DIS ABL ED DIS ABL ED
Tri b7 DIS ABL ED DIS ABL ED
Tri b8 DIS ABL ED DIS ABL ED

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

Field Setting Options Default


Port 1 Disabled, Enabled Disabled
Port 2 Disabled, Enabled Disabled

A prompt will ask if you wish to change the Configuration. Press Y for yes.

>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


172
User’s Manual
O9400-R

You will be returned to the Alarm Setup menu. Press the Esc key to return to the Controller
Menu. You must now store the new configuration. The menu path for storing a configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

6.29. File Transfer


The full menu path for File Transfer is as follows:

O > Logon
L > File Transfer

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA = ==Fi le Tra nsfe r== = 1 3:40 :02 08 /13/ 200 7

A -> D own load Ma inb oard Fi rmw are


B -> D own load Cu rre nt C onf igu rati on
C -> D own load Ba cku p Co nfi gur atio n
E -> U plo ad C urr ent Con fig ura tion fr om FLAS H
F -> U plo ad B ack up Conf igu rat ion fro m F LASH
G -> C han ge F irm war e Bo ot Ban k
H -> C opy fir mwa re to o the r XCU

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

Flash Memory, Current and Backup Configuration


There are two configuration banks in the system: one is current configuration bank, and the
other is backup configuration bank.

There are two ways to save the configuration: one is automatically, and the other is manually
through V-> command.

Normally, the running configuration is working in the Flash memory, and this running
configuration will be periodically and automatically copied to Current configuration bank.

When V command – Store is applied, the running configuration in the Flash memory will be
manually copied to Current configuration bank and Backup configuration bank.

When V command – Retrieve is applied, the configuration in Backup configuration bank will be
copied to Flash memory.

Download and Upload Direction


Download direction is from TFTP server to O9400R-XCU4
Upload direction is from O9400R-XCU4 to TFTP server.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


173
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


174
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.30. Download Mainboard Firmware


The full menu path for Download Mainboard Firmware is as follows:

O > Logon
L > File Transfer
A > Download Mainboard Firmware

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.30.1. Setup Screen Access


To download Mainboard Firmware, press L from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === Con tro ller Me nu === 16 :37 :43 08/ 10/ 200 7

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S - > Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H - > SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L -> Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y -> Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

The File Transfer menu will appear. Press A.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA == =Fi le Tran sfe r== = 13 :40 :02 08/ 13/ 200 7

A -> D own load Ma inb oard Fi rmw are


B -> D own load Cu rre nt C onf igu rati on
C -> D own load Ba cku p Co nfi gur atio n
E -> U plo ad C urr ent Con fig ura tion fr om FLAS H
F -> U plo ad B ack up Conf igu rat ion fro m F LASH
G -> C han ge F irm war e Bo ot Ban k
H -> C opy fir mwa re to o the r XCU

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


175
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.30.2. Download Mainboard Firmware Procedure


The Download Firmware screen will appear. Use the backspace key to clear the TFTP Server
IP field. Open the TFTP server file on your PC to obtain the correct IP address and file name.
Enter these in appropriate fields of the Download Firmware screen. Press the Enter key. A
prompt will ask if you really want to download. Press Y for yes. When the download is complete
the screen will appear as shown below.

O9400R-CC4 - CHA === Download Firmware === 16:02:25 08/14/2007


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort

Firmware 1 Version : V1.01.01 08/13/2007


Firmware 2 Version : V1.01.01 08/13/2007
Current Firmware Bank: 1
Next Boot Firmware : 1
TFTP Server IP : 010.003.011.001
Firmware File Name : O94Z.RUN

16:02:32 08/14/07 Downloading firmware ........1507328 bytes received.


16:03:33 08/14/07 Checksum ok. Next boot firmware switch to bank 2.

<< Press ESC key to abort, ENTER key to Upload/Download Firmware >>

The downloaded mainboard firmware is now in Bank 2. You must now power off the O9400R
device and then power it on again. When it reboots, it will switch to Bank 2, which is where the
downloaded mainboard firmware is.

When the O9400R device has both Primary XCU-4 and Redundant XCU-4 cards, the Copy
Firmware to standby Controller Card screen will appear. A prompt will ask if you are sure.
Press Y for yes.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA == = Download Mainboard Firmware === 11: 52:4 7 0 8/2 3/20 07

Copy fi rmw are to sta ndby XCU - are you su re ?

The procedure takes a minute or two. When it is complete a prompt will appear that says “Copy
Complete”.

NOTES: 1. For active new firmware, Cold Reset is recommended.


The TFTP User name and User Password is up to 20 characters.
If, at some future date, you download a newer version of firmware, it will be in
2.
Bank1 and you will have to reboot the O9400R device just as you did in the
procedure above

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


176
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.31. Download Current Configuration


This function is manually to download the current configuration file from the TFTP Server to the
O9400R-XCU4 and this current configuration will immediately make it as the current
configuration.

The full menu path for Download Current Configuration is as follows:

O > Logon
L > File Transfer
B > Download Current Configuration

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

NOTES: You can’t download a current configuration from the Loop-O9400R system
unless it has been previous upload to the system (see section Upload
Current Conifiguration from Flash).

6.31.1. Setup Screen Access


To download Current Configuration, press L from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA == = C ont roll er Men u == = 16: 37: 43 0 8/1 0/2 007

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 Controller Card Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S - > Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H - > SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L -> Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y -> Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


177
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The File Transfer menu will appear. Press B.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA == =Fi le Tran sfe r== = 13 :40 :02 08/ 13/ 200 7

A -> D own load Ma inb oard Fi rmw are


B -> D own load Cu rre nt C onf igu rati on
C -> D own load Ba cku p Co nfi gur atio n
E -> U plo ad C urr ent Con fig ura tion fr om FLAS H
F -> U plo ad B ack up Conf igu rat ion fro m F LASH
G -> C han ge F irm war e Bo ot Ban k
H -> C opy fir mwa re to o the r XCU

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

6.31.2. Download Current Configuration Procedure


The Download Current Configuration screen will appear. Use the backspace key to clear the
TFTP Server IP field. Open the TFTP server file on your PC to obtain the correct IP address
and file name. Enter these in appropriate fields of the Download Current Configuration screen.

Press the Enter key. A prompt will ask if you really want to download. Press Y for yes.

O940 0R- CC4 -CHA = == Dow nloa d C urr ent Con fig urat ion == = 1 6:5 7:0 1 08 /13 /20 07
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, BA CKS PACE to ed it, ESC to abo rt

TFTP Se rve r IP : 0 10. 003 .011 .00 1


Conf ig Fil e Na me : C urr ent .CFG

Real ly wan t to Do wnl oad ?

<< P res s E SC k ey to abor t, ENT ER k ey to Uplo ad/ Dow nloa d F irm ware >>

When the download is complete, the following screen will appear.

O9400R-CC4 - CHA === Download Current Configuration === 16:09:22 08/14/2007


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort

TFTP Server IP : 010.003.011.001


Config File Name : Current.CFG

16:09:37 08/14/07 Downloading current config....440400 bytes received.


16:10:00 08/14/07 Checksum ok.

<< Press ESC key to abort, ENTER key to Upload/Download Firmware >>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


178
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.32. Download Backup Configuration


This function is manually to download the backup configuration file from the SFTP Server to the
O9400R-XCU4.

The full menu path for Download Backup Configuration is as follows:

O > Logon
L > File Transfer
C > Download Backup Configuration

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

NOTES: You can’t download a backup configuration from the Loop-O9400R system
unless it has been previously uploaded to that system (see Section Upload
Backup Configuration from Flash).

6.32.1. Setup Screen Access


To download Backup Configuration, press L from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === Con tro ller Me nu === 16 :37 :43 08/ 10/ 200 7

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S - > Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H - > SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L -> Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N -> Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X -> Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


179
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The File Transfer menu will appear. Press C.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA == =Fi le Tran sfe r== = 13 :40 :02 0 8/ 13/ 200 7

A -> D own load Ma inb oard Fi rmw are


B -> D own load Cu rre nt C onf igu rati on
C -> D own load Ba cku p Co nfi gur atio n
E -> U plo ad C urr ent Con fig ura tion fr om FLAS H
F -> U plo ad B ack up Conf igu rat ion fro m F LASH
G -> C han ge F irm war e Bo ot Ban k
H -> C opy fir mwa re to o the r XCU

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

6.32.2. Download Backup Configuration Procedure

The Download Backup Configuration screen will appear. Use the backspace key to clear the
TFTP Server IP field. Open the TFTP server file on your PC to obtain the correct IP address
and file name. Enter these in appropriate fields of the Download Backup Configuration screen.
Press the Enter key.
A prompt will ask if you really want to download. Press Y for yes.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === Do wnlo ad Bac kup Con fig urat ion == = 1 6:5 7:0 1 08 /13 /20 07
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, BA CKS PACE to ed it, ESC to abo rt

TFTP Se rve r IP : 0 10. 003 .011 .00 1


Conf ig Fil e Na me : B ack up. CFG

Real ly wan t to Do wnl oad ?

<< P res s E SC k ey to abor t, ENT ER k ey to Uplo ad/ Dow nloa d F irm ware >>

When the download is complete, the following screen will appear.

O9400R-CC4 - CHA === Download Backup Configuration === 16:09:22 08/14/2007


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort

TFTP Server IP : 010.003.011.001


Config File Name : Backup.CFG

16:09:37 08/14/07 Downloading backup config....440400 bytes received.


16:10:00 08/14/07 Checksum ok.

<< Press ESC key to abort, ENTER key to Upload/Download Firmware >>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


180
User’s Manual
O9400-R

NOTES: You need to do Retrieve Command after download the backup configure.
When V command – Retrieve is applied, the configuration in Backup
configuration bank will be copied to Flash memory.

6.33. Upload Current Configuration from


FLASH
This function is manually to upload the current configuration file from Flash to the TFTP Server.

The full menu path for Upload Current Configuration from FLASH is as follows:

O > Logon
L > File Transfer
E > Upload Current Configuration from FLASH

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.33.1. Setup Screen Access

To upload Current Configuration from FLASH, press L from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === Con tro ller Me nu === 16 :37 :43 08/ 10/ 200 7

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S - > Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H - > SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L -> Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


181
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The File Transfer menu will appear. Press E.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA = ==F ile Tra nsf er= == 1 3:4 0:0 2 08 /13 /20 07

A -> D own load Ma inb oard Fi rmw are


B -> D own load Cu rre nt C onf igu rati on
C -> D own load Ba cku p Co nfi gur atio n
E -> U plo ad C urr ent Con fig ura tion fr om FLAS H
F -> U plo ad B ack up Conf igu rat ion fro m F LASH
G -> C han ge F irm war e Bo ot Ban k
H -> C opy fir mwa re to o the r XCU

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

6.33.2. Upload Current Configuration Procedure


The Upload Current Configuration screen will appear. Use the backspace key to clear the
TFTP Server IP field. Open the TFTP server file on your PC to obtain the correct IP address
and file name. Enter these in appropriate fields of the Upload Current Configuration screen.
Press the Enter key.

NOTES: The Config File Name field will accept a maximum of 56 alphanumeric
characters. The alphabetical characters are not case sensitive (ie. “Z.RUN” or
“z.run” would both be acceptable).

A prompt will ak if you really want to upload. Press Y for yes.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === Up lo ad Cu rre nt C onf igu rati on === 16 :57 :01 08/ 13/ 200 7
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, BA CKS PACE to ed it, ESC to abo rt

TFTP Se rve r IP : 0 10. 003 .011 .00 1


Conf ig Fil e Na me : C urr ent.CFG

Real ly wan t to Up loa d ?

<< P res s E SC k ey to abor t, ENT ER k ey to Upl o ad/ Dow nloa d F irm ware >>

When the upload is complete, the screen will appear as shown below.

O9400R-CC4 - CHA === Upload Current Configuration === 16:07:09 08/14/2007


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort

TFTP Server IP : 10.3.11.1


Config File Name : Current.CFG

16:08:07 08/14/07 Uploading current config..... 440400 bytes transmitted.


16:08:17 08/14/07 Upload ok.

<< Press ESC key to continue >>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


182
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.34. Upload Backup Configuration from


FLASH
This function is manually to upload the backup configuration file from Flash to the TFTP Server.

The full menu path for Upload Backup Configuration from FLASH is as follows:

O > Logon
L > File Transfer
F > Upload Backup Configuration from FLASH

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.34.1. Setup Screen Access


To upload Backup Configuration from FLASH, press L from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === Con tro ller Me nu === 16 :37 :43 08/ 10/ 200 7

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S - > Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H - > SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L -> Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


183
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The File Transfer menu will appear. Press F.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === Fil e Tr ans fer === 13: 40: 02 0 8/1 3/2 007

A -> D own load Ma inb oard Fi rmw are


B -> D own load Cu rre nt C onf igu rati on
C -> D own load Ba cku p Co nfi gur atio n
E -> U plo ad C urr ent Con fig ura tion fr om FLAS H
F -> U plo ad B ack up Conf igu rat ion fro m F LASH
G -> C han ge F irm war e Bo ot Ban k
H -> C opy fir mwa re to o the r XCU

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

6.34.2. Upload Backup Configuration from FLASH


Procedure
The Upload Backup Configuration from FLASH screen will appear. Use the backspace key to
clear the TFTP Server IP field. Open the TFTP server file on your PC to obtain the correct IP
address and file name. Type in the IP address and the Config file name. Press the Enter key.

A prompt will ask if you really want to upload. Press Y for yes.

O9400R-CC4 - CHA === Upload Backup Configuration === 16:07:09 08/14/2007


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort

TFTP Server IP : 10.3.11.1


Config File Name : Backup.CFG

Really want to Upload ?

<< Press ESC key to abort, ENTER key to Upload/Download Firmware >>

When the upload is complete, the screen will appear as shown below.

O9400R-CC4 - CHA === Upload Backup Configuration === 16:07:09 08/14/2007


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort

TFTP Server IP : 10.3.11.1


Config File Name : Backup.CFG

16:08:07 08/14/07 Uploading backup config..... 440400 bytes transmitted.


16:08:17 08/14/07 Upload ok.

<< Press ESC key to continue >>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


184
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.35. Change Firmware Boot Bank


This function is to identify which firmware will be used at the next reboot. It does not cause the
reboot to occur.

The full menu path for Change Firmware Boot Bank is as follows:

O > Logon
L > File Transfer
G > Change Firmware Boot Bank

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.35.1. Setup Screen Access


To change the Firmware Boot Bank, press L from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === Con tro ller Me nu === 16 :37 :43 08/ 10/ 200 7

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT

[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]


C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S - > Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H - > SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M -> Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L -> Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z -> Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


185
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The File Transfer menu will appear. Press G.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA == =Fi le Tran sfe r== = 11 :28 :53 08/ 23/ 200 7

A -> D own load Ma inb oard Fi rmw are


B -> D own load Cu rre nt C onf igu rati on
C -> D own load Ba cku p Co nfi gur atio n
E -> U plo ad C urr ent Con fig ura tion fr om FLAS H
F -> U plo ad B ack up Conf igu rat ion fro m F LASH
G -> C han ge F irm war e Bo ot Ban k
H -> C opy fir mwa re to o the r XCU

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

6.35.2. Change Firmware Boot Bank Procedure

The Change Firmware Boot Bank screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in your setting.
Settings choices are: 1 or 2. Press the Enter key.

O9400R-CC4 - CHA === Change Firmware Boot Bank === 11:30:39 08/23/2007
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

Bank1 Firmware : V1.01.01 07/24/2007


Bank2 Firmware : V1.01.01 08/13/2007
Current Boot Bank : 2
Next Boot Bank : 2

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you really want to change the boot bank ? Press Y for Yes or N for No.
You will be returend to the File Transfer menu. This procedure is complete.

Really want to change the boot bank ?

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


186
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.36. Copy Firmware to Other Controller


Card
This function is simply copy the downloaded main-board firmware from Primary XCU-4 card to
Redundant XCU-4 card. It is used after firmware has been downloaded to one XCU-4 to
ensure that both XCU-4 have the same firmware. The management of O9400R-XCU4 and the
user traffic are not affected by this operation.

The full menu path for Copy Firmware to other controlle card is as follows:

O > Logon
L > File Transfer
H > Copy Firmware to Other XCU

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.36.1. Setup Screen Access


To copy firmware to other Controller Card, press L from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === Co ntr olle r M enu === 1 6:3 7:4 3 08 /10 /20 07

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S - > Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H - > SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L -> Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N -> Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X -> Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


187
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The File Transfer menu will appear. Press H.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === Fil e Tr ans fer === 11: 28: 53 0 8/2 3/2 007

A -> D own load Ma inb oard Fi rmw are


B -> D own load Cu rre nt C onf igu rati on
C -> D own load Ba cku p Co nfi gur atio n
E -> U plo ad C urr ent Con fig ura tion fr om FLAS H
F -> U plo ad B ack up Conf igu rat ion fro m F LASH
G -> C han ge F irm war e Bo ot Ban k
H -> C opy fir mwa re to o the r XCU

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

6.36.2. Copy Firmware to Other XCU Procedure

The Copy Firmware to Other XCU (controller card) screen will appear. A prompt will ask if you
are sure. Press Y for yes.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA = == Copy fi rmw are to oth er XCU === 11 :52 :47 08/ 23/ 200 7

Copy fi rmw are to sta ndby XCU - are you su re ?

The procedure takes a minute or two. When it is complete a prompt will appear that says “Copy
Complete”.

O9400R-CC4 - CHA === Copy firmware to other XCU === 13:57:59 09/07/2007

Copy firmware to standby XCU - are you sure ? Y \ 958

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


188
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.37. Controller Card Firmware


Synchronization
Operating the O9400R-XCU with different controller firmware might cause traffic loss if the
working controller card fails. Please refer to the following procedure for the controller firmware
synchronization.

Determine the firmware version on the controller card module and, if necessary, copy the desired firmware to
the standby controller card module by performing the following steps:
__ 1. From the Controller menu select option I ->System Information.
__ 2. Select option 1->XCU Information.
__ 3. Record the firmware version._____________________
__ 4. If the firmware version on both Controller Cards are not the same, from the Controller menu,
select option L-> File Transfer.
__ 5. From the File Transfer menu select option H->Copy Firmware to Other XCU.
__ 6. The system outputs, “Copy firmware to standby XCU-are you sure?” Click Y.
__ 7. Wait for the copy to complete.
__ 8. From the Controller menu select option Z->Reset.
__ 9. From the Reset menu select option B->XCU Reset.
__ 10. From the XCU Reset menu select one of the following options:
- Standby Warm-RST
- Standby Cold-RST
This resets the standby Controller Card and activates the new firmware

Note: After a reset, the two controller card modules synchronize. During the synchronization, the O9400R-
Controller card does not respond to VT-100, Telnet, SSH, and SNMP Poll. The O9400R-Controller
card synchronization takes approximately two minutes to complete. After synchronization completes,
the system responds to VT-100, Telnet, SSH, and SNMP Poll.
__ 11. From the Controller menu select option I ->System Information.
__ 12. Select option 1->XCU Information.
__ 13. Verify the firmware version on the controller card module.

Note: If the system shows XCU1 working: Configuration SYNC, Frame Pulse SYNC, the two controller
cards are in protection.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


189
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.38. Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration


The full menu path for Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration is as follows:

O > Logon
V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.38.1. Setup Screen Access


To Store/Retrieve Backup Config, press V from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === Co ntr olle r M enu === 1 6:3 7:4 3 08 /10 /20 07

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S - > Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H - > SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L - > Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V -> St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

6.38.2. Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration Procedure

The Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move
the cursor to either STORE or RETRIEVE. Press the Enter key.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA = ==S tore /Re tri eve Con fig urat ion === 13: 41: 34 0 8/2 3/2 007

>> S ele ct ? *ST ORE R ETR IEVE

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


190
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.38.2.1. Store Backup Configuration

To store the configuration, press Y for Yes.

>> Select ? *STORE RETRIEVE


>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]

You will be asked to type in your password. After keying it in, press the Enter key.

==>> Enter password :

A prompt will advise you that the configuration is being saved. The prompt will disappear when
the storage procedure is complete..

===> Saving.......

6.38.2.2. Retrieve Backup Configuration


To retrieve the configuration press Y for Yes.

O9400R-CC4 - CHA ===Store/Retrieve Configuration=== 15:54:18 08/23/2007

>> Select ? STORE *RETRIEVE


>> Retrieve Last Stored Configuration ? [Y/N]

You will be asked for your password. Key it in. Press the Enter key.

==>> Enter password :

A prompt will advise you that the retrieval is proceeding.

===> Retrieving ... Reload configuration...

The prompt will disappear when the retrieval procedure is complete.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


191
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.39. Loopback/Diagnostics Setup


The full menu path for Loopback/Diagnostics Setup is as follows:

O > Logon
G > Loopback/Diagnostics Setup

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.39.1. Setup Screen Access


To set up Loopback/Diagnostics, press G from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === Co ntr olle r M enu === 1 6:3 7:4 3 08 /10 /20 07

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S - > Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H - > SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L - > Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G -> Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

6.39.2. Loopback/Diagnostics Setup Procedure

The Loopback/Diagnostics Setup Menu screen will appear. Press A for XCU Port Looback
Test, or B for XCU Diagnostics.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA == = L oop back /Di agn osti cs Set up M enu == = 16 :13 :09 08/ 23/ 200 7

A -> XCU Po rt L oopb ack Te st


B -> XCU Di agn o stic s

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a co m man d > >

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


192
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.39.2.1. XCU Port Loopback Test Setup Procedure


Press A from the Loopback/Diagnostics Setup Menu. The XCU Port Loopback Test
screen will appear Type in a value (in seconds) to specify the duration of the intended
loopback. (Range is 0 to 99999). Press the Enter key.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA == = XCU P ort Loop bac k T est === 16 :16 :31 08/ 23/ 200 7
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : 0 to 999 99, BAC KSP ACE to edi t

Loop bac k T imer : 000 01 s eco nd( s)


('0' se con d re pre sen ts d oin g l oopb ack (s) in unl imi ted tim e.)
(War nin g!L ine wil l n ot r eco ver if doi ng loop bac k(s ) in un lim ited ti me. )

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

Table 6-34 Controller Card Port Loopback Test Setting


Controller Card Port Loopback Test Setting
Field Setting Note
Options
XCU1 (W) Port1 OFF,
XCU1 (W) Port2 LOC, LOC: Local Loopback
XCU2 (E) Port1 PLB, PLB: Payload
XCU2 (E) Port2 LLB LLB: Loopback
Line Loopback

6.39.2.2. Controller Card Diagnostics Setup Procedure


Press B from the Loopback/Diagnostics Setup Menu. The controller card Diagnostics screen
will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the various fields. Use the Tab key to
scroll in the Line Side and Aggregate Line settings. Press the Enter key. Other setting
requirements will be highlighted on the screen depending upon which mode you are in (ie.SDH
or SONET).
Press the Enter key.

Table 6-35 Controller Card Diagnostics Settings


Controller Card Diagnostics Settings
Field SDH Mode Settings SONET Mode Settings
Line side XCU1(W), XCU2(E)
Aggregate Port-1, Port-1(Full), Port-2, Port-2(Full).
Line
AUG#1 1 to 4 -
VC3 FULL, VC3#1*, VC3#2*, VC3#3* -
STS3# 1 to 4
STS1 FULL, STS1#1, STS1#2,
STS1#3
Test Pattern OFF, PRBS (2^23)

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


193
User’s Manual
O9400-R

NOTES: * it depends on the setting of granularity AUG#1, VC3, STS3#, and STS1 are
not support in Full Mode (i.e. Port-1 (Full))

A screen will appear showing you that test patterns are being sent. Press S to stop sending
test patterns. Press R to reset test patterns.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === XCU D i agno sti cs === 13 :06 :16 08/ 30/ 200 7
Pres s S to sto p s end ing pat ter ns o r R to res et pat tern s

Send ini g T est Pat ter n to =>

Line Si de : XC U1( W) Agg reg ate Lin e : Po rt- 2 (Fu ll)

Test Pa tte rn : PR BS( 2^23 )

---- BE RT Stat us --- -


SYNC St ate : L OST SY NC
Elap sed Se cond (s) : 12
Bit Err or coun t(s ): 0
BER : 0.0
ES : 0
ESR : 0.0
SES : 0
SESR : 0.0
UAS : 12
Inse rt err or(s ) : 0

<< L eft ar row key to cle ar sta tus, ri ght arr ow key to ins ert err or >>
<< E SC key to ret urn to pre vio us m enu , S PACE ba r t o re fre sh >>

This procedure is complete. Press the Esc key twice to return to the Controller Menu.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


194
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.40. Performance Setup/Clear


The full menu path for Performance Setup/Clear is as follows:

O > Logon
R > Performance Setup/Clear
C > Clear Performance Data or D > Performance Threshold Setup

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.40.1. Setup Screen Access


To setup Performance, press R from the Controller Menu.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === Con tro ller Me nu === 12 :06 :42 08/ 10/ 200 7

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S -> Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H - > SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L - > Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V -> St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R -> Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N - > Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X - > Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

The Performance Setup/Clear Menu will appear.

O9400R-CC4 - CHA === Performance Setup/Clear === 12:02:43 08/10/2007

C -> Clear Performance Data


D -> Performance Threshold Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


195
User’s Manual
O9400-R

6.40.1.1. Clear Performancer Data Procedure


Press C from the Performance Setup/Clear menu. A prompt will ask “Are you sure [Y/N}?”
Press Y for yes or N for no.

O9400R-CC4 - CHA === Performance Setup/Clear === 15:01:03 08/10/2007

C -> Clear Performance Data


D -> Performance Threshold Setup

>> Clear performance data - are you sure [Y/N] ?

6.40.1.2. Performance Threshold Setup Procedure


Press D from the Performance Setup/Clear menu.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === Per for man ce S etu p/C lear == = 1 5:0 1:0 3 08 /10 /20 07

C -> Cl ear Per for manc e D ata


D -> Pe rfor man ce Thre sho ld Setu p

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

The Perf. Threshold Cross Alarm Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the
cursor. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings.

NOTES: Some settings must be typed in.

Table 6-36 Performance Threshold Settings


Performance Threshold Settings
Field SDH Mode Settings
En/Dis EN, DIS
severity INFO, MINR, MAJR, CRIT
threshold 1 to 99999 (BIP Error
Rate)

Press the Enter key.

O9400R-CC4 - CHA === Perf. Threshold Cross Alarm Setup ===15:05:24 08/10/2007
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 1 to 99999, BACKSPACE to edit

Monitor Point En/Dis severity Threshold


BIP-S(B1) DIS INFO 02400
BIP-L(B2) EN INFO 09600
REI-L EN INFO 09600
BIP-P(B3) EN INFO 02400
REI-P EN INFO 02400
BIP-V(V5) EN INFO 00600
REI-V(V5) EN INFO 00600
BIP-V(B3) EN INFO 02400
REI-V(B3) EN INFO 19200

A prompt will ask if you wish to change the Configuration. Press Y for yes.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


196
User’s Manual
O9400-R

>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

You will be returned to the Performance Setup/Clear menu. Press the Esc key to return to the
Controller Menu. You must now store the new configuration. The menu path for storing a
configuration:

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

6.41. Unit Registration


A plug-in card (ie. E1/T1, B155/622) card must be registered before you can configure it
The full menu path for Unit Registration is as follows:

O > Logon
N > Unit Registration

A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

6.41.1. Setup Screen Access

To register a plug-in card, press N from the Controller Menu.


O940 0R - CC4 -CHA === Con tro ller Me nu === 16 :37 :43 08/ 10/ 200 7

Seri al Num ber : 01 0525 Devi ce Nam e : O94 00R


Hard war e V ersi on: D Star t T ime : 10: 04:3 1 0 8/1 0/20 07
Soft war e V ersi on: V1 .01. 01 07/ 24/2 007 Conn ect Po rt : SUP V_PO RT
FPGA Ve rsi on : V1 XCU Pro tec ti on: Red und ant Rea dy
[DIS PLA Y] [SET UP]
C -> Sy ste m Co nfi g D ispl ay S - > Sy ste m Co nfi g S etup
D -> SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Di spl ay H - > SD H/S ONET Co nfi g Se tup
I -> Sy ste m In for mat ion M - > Al arm Set up
Q -> Al arm Que ue L - > Fi le Tran sfe r
B -> Cu rre ntly -Ac tiv e Al arm Su mmar y V - > St ore /Ret rie ve Back up Con fig
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s G - > Lo opb ack/ Dia gno stic s S etu p
P -> SD H/S ONET Pe rfo rman ce R - > Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
T -> Sy ste m Lo g N -> Un it Regi str ati on
E -> Di agn osti cs Dis play

[LOG ] [MIS C]
F -> Lo g O ff Y - > Al arm Cut Of f
O -> Lo g O n Z - > Re set
U -> Ch oos e a Tri b U nit X -> Cl ear Ala rm Que ue
W -> Re tur n to De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

6.41.2. Unit Registration Procedure


The Unit Registration screen will appear. It lists the card types in the various tributary slots.
Use the Tab key to scroll in a command. Command choices are: Card Registration, Accept
Current Port Number, or Card Unregistration. Press the Enter key after scrolling in your
selection.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


197
User’s Manual
O9400-R

O9400R-CC4 - CHA === Unit Registration === 14:45:02 05/06/2009


ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

Slot REG. Model/Mode Card Model Software Version Remark


==== =============== ================ =================== =================
#1 B155/622 V1.04.02 04/06/2009
#2 B155/622 V1.04.02 04/06/2009
#3 B155/622 V1.04.02 04/06/2009
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8 E3/T3 V1.01.02 05/04/2009
(PRTD = Protected, NP = No Protection)

Command : Card Registration

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Scroll in the unit you wish to register. Press the Enter key. Scroll in the registered model. Press
the Enter key. A prompt (Registration…..) will be displayed as the registration occurs.
O9400R-CC4 - CHA === Unit Registration === 14:45:02 05/06/2009
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

Slot REG. Model/Mode Card Model Software Version Remark


==== =============== ================ =================== =================
#1 B155/622 V1.04.02 04/06/2009
#2 B155/622 V1.04.02 04/06/2009
#3 B155/622 V1.04.02 04/06/2009
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8 E3/T3 V1.01.02 05/04/2009
(PRTD = Protected, NP = No Protection)

Command : Card Registration


Unit : Trib-1
REG. Model/Mode : STM1-MSP(1+1)
Registration......

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

NOTES: If you want to change a registered card from E1/E3 toT1/T3 or vice-versa, you
1. must de-register the card and register it again. Deregistration is similar to the
registration process.
Before you register the E3T3 card to T3-M13 mode, be sure to enable the
2. M13 function first in the (K) M13 setup section under the O9400R controller
menu. Command path: O9400R controller menu > (S) System Config Setup >
(K) M13 setup.
For B155/622 card, to change the optical line rate (For example from OC-3 to
3. OC-12), you must de-register the card and then re-register it. The procedure
for de-registration is similar to the process for registration except you use the
command Un-registration.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


198
User’s Manual
O9400-R

To change the registration mode from STM1 to STM4 of B155/622 card, scroll in the unit you
wish to register. Press the Enter key. Scroll in the registered model. Press the Enter key.
O9400R-CC4-CHA === Unit Registration === 15:17:52 05/11/2017
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

SL. REG. Model/Mode Card Model Software Version Remark


=== ===================== =============== =================== ==============
#1 ENETSW-PRTD FE V2.09.03 (0010) Card Mismatch
#2 ENETSW-PRTD
#3 ENETSW-PRTD
#4 ENETSW-PRTD
#5 ENETSW-PRTD FESW V2.09.03 (0010)
#6 ENETSW-PRTD
#7 STM1-MSP(1+1) B155/622 V1.13.01 (0004)
#8 STM1-MSP(1+1)
(PRTD = Protected, NP = No Protection)

Command : Change Registration Mode


Unit : Trib-7
REG. Model/Mode : STM4-MSP(1+1)

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

NOTES: Changing the registration mode from STM1 to STM4 of B155/622 card will
not deleted the XCs on the card; however, this operation is irreversible. If
you want to change a registered card from STM4 to STM1, you must de-
register the card and the register it again. The procedure for de-registration
is similar to the process for registration.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


199
User’s Manual
O9400-R

There are several different card types. They are listed in the table below.
Table 6-37 Card Model Type
Card Model Registered Model Slots Notes
B155/622 STM4-MSP(1+1) Slot 7 and 8 only
STM1-MSP(1+1) Use any slots
STM1-SNCP Slots 5 to 8 only
STM1-NP Slots 5 to 8 only No-protection
OC12-MSP(1+1) Slot 7 and 8 only
OC3-MSP(1+1) Use any slots
OC3-UPSR Slots 5 to 8 only
OC3-NP Slots 5 to 8 only No-protection

E1/T1 63/32/16 ports E1-PRTD(63/32/16Port) Use any slots Protected


E1-NP(63/32/16Port) Slots5 to 8 only No-protection
T1-PRTD(63/32/16Port) Use any slots Protected
T1-NP(63/32/16Port) Slots 5 to 8 only No-protection

E1-75ohm 63/32/16 E1-75ohm-PRTD (63/32/16Port) Use any slots Protected


ports
E1-75ohm-NP (63/32/16Port) Slots 5 to 8 only No-protection

E3/T3 E3-PRTD Use any slots Protected


E3-NP Slots 5 to 8 only No-protection
T3-PRTD Use any slots Protected
T3-NP Slots 5 to 8 only No-protection
T3-M13-PRTD Use any slots Protected
T3-M13-NP Slots 5 to 8 only No-protection

Ethernet with Switch ENETSW-PRTD Use any slots Protected


ENETSW-NP Slots 5 to 8 only No-protection

Ethernet ENET-PRTD Use any slots Protected


ENET-NP Slot 5 to 8 only No-protection

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


200
User’s Manual
O9400-R

7. SDH/SONET FEATURES

7.1. Introduction
SONET and SDH use different terms to describe the three layers. SONET uses the terms
Section, Line, and Path. SONET terminology is illustrated in Figure below.

#
SONET SONET SONET SONET SONET SONET
Multiplexer Regenerator Cross Multiplexer
Connect

Section Section

Line Line

Path

Figure 7-1 SONET Layer Terminology

SDH uses the terms Regenerator Section, Multiplex Section and Path. SDH terminology is
illustrated in Figure below.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


201
User’s Manual
O9400-R

#
SDH SDH SDH SDH SDH SDH
Multiplexer Regenerator Cross Multiplexer
Connect

Regenerator Section Regenerator Section

Multiplex Section Multiplex Section

Path

Figure 7-2 SDH Layer Terminology

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


202
User’s Manual
O9400-R

7.2. Multiplexing structure and Mapping


modes
The Loop-O9400R complies with the basic multiplexing principles outlined in ITU-T G.707
clause 6 and ETSI EN 300147 clause 4. The Loop-O9400R supports the multiplexing
structure outlined in Figure 6-1. This is a subset of the possible multiplexing structures
defined in ITU-T G.707 clause 6 and ETSI EN 300 147 clause 4.

Figure 7-3 Multiplexing/Mapping Structure adapted from ITU-T G.707/Y.1322

The Loop-O9400R complies with the multiplexing methods outlined in ITU-T G.707 clause 7
and ETSI EN 300 147 clause 5 for the supported multiplexing structures.

7.2.1. Mapping of Tributaries into VC-n


7.2.1.1. Asynchronous of 44 736 kbps
The Loop-O9400R supports asynchronous mapping of 44 736 Kbps signal into a VC-3
container as shown in Figure 6-2, below. The mapping is in accordance to ITU-T G.707
clause 10.1.2.1 and ETSI EN 300 147 Clause 8.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


203
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Figure 7-4 Asynchronous Mapping of 44 736 kbps Tributary into VC-3

7.2.1.2. Asynchronous mapping of 34 368 kbps

The Loop-O9400R supports asynchronous mapping of 34 368 kbps signal into a VC-3
container as shown in Figure 6-3, below. The mapping is in accordance to ITU-T G.707 clause
10.1.2.2 and ETSI EN 300 147 Clause 8

Figure 7-5 Asynchronous Mapping of 34 368 kbps Tributary into VC-3

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


204
User’s Manual
O9400-R

7.2.1.3. Asynchronous mapping of 2048kbps


The Loop-O9400R supports Asynchronous mapping of 2048kbps signal into a VC-12 container
as shown in Figure 6-4. The mapping is in accordance to ITU-T G.707 clause 10.1.4.1 and
ETSI EN 300 147 Clause 8.

Figure 7-6 Asynchronous Mapping of 2048kbps into VC-12

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


205
User’s Manual
O9400-R

7.2.1.4. Mapping of GFP Frames


The Loop-O9400R supports the generic framing procedure (GFP) to encapsulate variable
length payload of various client signals for subsequent transport over SDH networks as
defined in ITU-T G.707. The Loop-O9400R supports mapping of a GFP frame stream into a
Container-n (n=12,3,4 or12/3/4-Xv) as shown in Figure 7-7, below. The mapping is in
accordance to ITU-T G.707 clause 10.6.

Figure 7-7 Mapping of GFP Frames into C-n

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


206
User’s Manual
O9400-R

7.2.1.5. Loop Proprietary Mapping of RS232


The Loop-O9400R provides a proprietary mapping scheme for mapping of RS232
encapsulated Ethernet frames traffic into C-12 containers. The proprietary mapping scheme
used to map the data into a C-12 container is described in Figure 7-8, below.

Figure 7-8 Loop Proprietary Mapping of RS232

7.2.1.6. TM-N Physical layer

The O9400R offers the following physical interfaces:


• Optical STM-1 interfaces, S1.1, L1.1, L1.2
• Optical STM-4 interfaces, S4.1, L4.1, L4.2

The Loop-O9400R implements the supported Physical layer functions in accordance to


ITU-T G.783 clause 9.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


207
User’s Manual
O9400-R

7.2.1.7. STM-N Regenerator and Multiplex Section layer


The O9400R implements the STM-N (n=1,4) Regenerator and Multiplex Section layer
functions in accordance to ITU-T G.783 clause 10 and 11.

SOH implementation
The O9400R complies with the SOH implementation methods outlined in ITU-T G.707 clause 9
and ETSI EN 300 147 clause 7. The assignment of the STM-n SOH is outlined in Figure 7-9,
below.

Figure 7-9 STM-n Section Overhead (SOH)

7.2.1.8. VC-n/m Path layer


The O9400R offers the support of the following payloads:

• VC-4 (STS-3c)
• VC-4-Xv (STS-3c-Xv)
• VC-3 (STS-1)
• VC-3-Xv (STS-1-Xv)
• VC-12 (VT2)
• VC-12-Xv (VT2-Xv)
• VC-11 (VT1.5)

The Loop-O9400R implements the supported Path layer functions in accordance to ITU-T
G.783 clause 12 for VC-n, where n=4-X, 4, 3-X, 3(STS-3c-X, STS-3c, STS-1-X, STS-1).

The Loop-O9400R implements the supported Path layer functions in accordance to ITU-
T G.783 clause 13 for VC-m, where m=12-X, 12, 11 (VT2-X, VT2, VT1.5).

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


208
User’s Manual
O9400-R

7.2.1.9. VC-4/VC-3 POH Implementation


The O9400R complies with the POH implementation methods outlined in ITU-T G.707 clause
9 and ETSI EN 300 147 clause 7. The assignment of the VC-4 POH is outlined in Figure
below.

The O9400R supports all the VC-4/VC-3 POH bytes as described in ITU-T G.707 Clause
9.3.1, with the following exceptions:

• G1 bit 6 and 7 Enhanced RDI, Clause 9.3.1.4 is not supported


• Path user channels F2 and F3, Clause 9.3.1.5 are not supported
• K3 byte, Clause 9.3.1.7, 9.3.1.9-10 is not supported
• Network operator byte N1, Clause 9.3.1.8 is not supported

Figure 7-10 VC-4 POH

Figure 7-11 OC-12 Concatenation


Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.
209
User’s Manual
O9400-R

7.2.1.10. VC-2/VC-1 POH Implementation


The Loop-O9400R complies with the POH implementation methods outlined in ITU-T G.707
clause 9 and ETSI EN 300 147 clause 7. The assignment of the VC-12 POH is outlined in
Figure 7-11, below.

Figure 7-12 VC-12 POH

The O9400R supports all the VC-2/VC-1 POH bytes as described in ITU-T G.707 Clause 9.3.1,
with the following exceptions:

• Network operator byte N2, Clause 9.3.2.3 is not supported


• K4 byte (b3-b8), clause 9.3.2.6-8 is not supported

7.2.2. Cross-connect
The O9400R implements a full non-blocking STM-1/4 cross connect with VC11, VC12,
VC-3 and VC-4 (VT1.5, VT2, STS-1, STS-3c)granularity.

The following cross connect types are supported:


• Bi-directional connections on all levels
• Uni-directional connections on all levels.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


210
User’s Manual
O9400-R

7.2.3. Concatenation schemes


7.2.3.1. Virtual concatenation
The O9400R supports virtual concatenation, the following VC-n-Xv are supported:
• VC-12-Xv (VT1-Xv)
• VC-3-Xv (STS-1-Xv)
• VC-4-Xv (STS-3c-Xv)

TheO9400R implements the supported VC-4-Xv and VC-3-Xv functionality in accordance to


ITU-T G.707 clause 11.2 and ETSI EN 300147 Clause 9.

The O9400R implements the supported VC-12-Xv functionality in accordance to ITU-T


G.707 clause 11.4 and ETSI EN 300147 Clause 9. Virtual concatenation is supported in
conjunction with EOS mapping and is module dependent.

7.2.4. Protection
The O9400R offers the following different protection schemes:

• MSP 1+1 protection


• SNC protection

MSP 1+1
Protection O9400R
SNC
SDH Protection

Figure 7-13 Protection schemes for Loop-O9400R

7.2.4.1. MSP 1+1 linear


The O9400R offers Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) 1+1 linear on all optical STM-N
interfaces.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


211
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The following rule applies for the MSP 1+1 protection:

• Protection can only be enabled between two ports of the same STM-N type.

The MSP 1+1 functionality is in accordance with ITU-T G.841, clause 7.1. The following
parameters are configurable on an MSP object:

• Enabled/disabled
• Mode, unidirectional or bi-directional
• Operation Type, revertive or non-revertive

The protocol used for K1 and K2 (b1-b5) is defined in ITU-T G.841, clause
7.1.4.5.1. The protocol used is 1+1 bi-directional switching compatible with 1:n bi-directional
switching.

7.2.4.2. SNC Protection


Two types of SNC protection are supported: SNC/I (Sub Network Connection protection with
Inherent monitoring) and SNC/N (Sub Network Connection protection with non-intrusive
monitoring). SNC is supported for the following objects:

• VC-11 (VT1.5)
• VC-12 (VT2)
• VC-3 (STS-1)
• VC-4 (STS-3c)

The SNCP functionality is in accordance with ITU-T G.841 Clause 8. The following
parameters are configurable on an SNCP object:

• Enabled/disabled
• Operation Type, revertive or non-revertive

The Application architecture supported is 1+1 unidirectional switching, according to ITU-T


G.841 clause 8.3.2. The switch initiation criteria are implemented as dEscribed in ITU-T
G.841 clause 8.4. The protection algorithm is implemented according to ITU-T G.841
clause 8.6.

SNC Protected Uni-directional Cross-connection Limitations


When one direction of a path forms part of an SNC protected uni- directional cross connection,
the other direction can not form part of a different SNC protected uni-directional cross-
connection. But the two directions can form part of two different uni-directional un-protected
cross connections. This applies to uni-directional cross-connections on all path layers.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


212
User’s Manual
O9400-R

7.2.5. Performance Monitoring

In the subsequent chapters the following definition are used, according to G.826:

• Errored second (ES): A one second period with one or more errored blocks or at least
one defect.
• Severely errored second (SES): A one second period which contains >=
30% errored blocks or at least one defect
• Background block error (BBE): An errored block not occurring as a part of an SES
• Unavailable seconds (UAS): A period of unavailable time begins at the onset of ten
consecutive SES events. These ten seconds are considered to be part of unavailable
time. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES
events. These ten seconds are considered to be part of available time. UAS is the
number of second of unavailable time.

7.2.5.1. Regenerator and multiplex section performance


monitoring

The O9400R offers full performance monitoring on regenerator and multiplex sections
according to G.829.

The following parameters are calculated:

• ES
• SES
• BBE
• UAS

For the regenerator section near end data are presented, for the multiplex section both near
end and far end data are presented.

The available time periods are:

• 15 minutes
• 24 hours

The system presents current data and historical data, the number of time periods are:

• 96x15 minute
• 7x24 hours

The O9400R calculates excessive error and degrade signal defects assuming Poisson
distribution of errors, according to ITU-T G.826.

The excessive error defect (dEXC) is detected if the equivalent BER exceeds a pre-set
threshold of 10E-5, and be cleared if the equivalent BER is better than 10E-6, according to ITU-
T G.806.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


213
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The degraded signal defect (dDEG) is detected if the equivalent BER exceeds a pre-set
threshold of 10E-X, where x=6, 7, 8 or 9. The dDEG is cleared if the equivalent BER is better
than 10E-(X+1), according to ITU-T G.806 .The threshold is individual configurable for the
regenerator and multiplex section, from 10E-6 to 10E-9.

7.2.5.2. Path performance monitoring


The O9400R offers full performance monitoring on the SDH path level according to G.828,
the following objects are supported:

• VC-11 (VT1.5)
• VC-12 (VT2)
• VC-3 (STS-1)
• VC-4 (STS-3c)

The following parameters are calculated:

• ES
• SES
• BBE
• UAS

Both near end and far end data are presented. The available time periods are:

• 15 minutes
• 24 hours

The system presents current data and historical data, the number of time periods are:

• 96x15 minute
• 7x24 hours

The O9400R calculates excessive error and degrade signal defects assuming Poisson
distribution of errors, according to ITU-T G.826.

The excessive error defect (dEXC) is detected if the equivalent BER exceeds a pre-set
threshold of 10E-5, and be cleared if the equivalent BER is better than 10E-6, according to ITU-
T G.806.

The degraded signal defect (dDEG) is detected if the equivalent BER exceeds a pre-set
threshold of 10E-X, where x=6, 7, 8 or 9. The dDEG is cleared if the equivalent BER is better
than 10E-(X+1), according to ITU-T G.806 .The threshold is individual configurable for the
different objects, from 10E-6 to 10E-9.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


214
User’s Manual
O9400-R

7.2.5.3. Synchronization
The O9400R offers synchronization from a range of different interfaces.

In addition to the module interfaces it is possible to synchronize from a 2MHz synchronization


input source on the controller module. The interface is according to ITU-T G.703. The O9400R
also offers a synchronization output port in the same connector, according to ITU-T G703.

The different interfaces allowed for synchronization are listed below. Synchronisation
sources:

• E1/T1 interface
• E3/T3 interface
• STM-1/4
• 2MHz sync input
• 2Mbps
• 1.5Mbps

Through the SETS (Synchronous Equipment Timing Source), the synchronization signals are
distributed to the equipment ports.

The O9400R offers a list of 4 possible synchronization sources for the T0, selection of the sync
source is based upon the quality level.

The O9400R supports SSM messaging on the STM-N interfaces; this is not supported on
the E1/T1/E3/T3 interface.

7.3. PDH Features


7.3.1. E1 features
General information
Loop-O9400R supports a number of E1 interfaces that are mapped into SDH VC-12
containers.

Different E1 tributary modules are available supporting up to 16/32/63 E1 channels interface.

Loop-O9400R supports a number of T1 interfaces that are mapped into SONET VT-1.5
containers.

Different T1 tributary modules are available supporting up to 16, 32 or 63 T1 channels.

Transparent Leased Line


E1 transparent leased line
The transparent or unstructured leased line service delivers a full digital bit rate of 2048
kbps with no restriction on the binary content.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


215
User’s Manual
O9400-R

The service is symmetrical in both directions and only supports point-to- point connections.
The service is specified in EN 300 247 and the network interface is specified in EN 300 418.

An alarm indication signal (AIS) is inserted toward the network if loss of signal (LOS) is
detected from the customer.

AIS is also inserted towards the customer if LOS or other major alarms are detected from
the networks.

T1 transparent leased line


The transparent or unstructured leased line service delivers a full digital bit rate of 1544kbps
with no restriction on the binary content.

The service is symmetrical in both directions and only supports point-to- point connections.

An alarm indication signal (AIS) is inserted toward the network if loss of signal (LOS)
isdetected from the customer.

AIS is also inserted towards the customer if LOS or other major alarms are detected from
the networks.

7.3.2. E3/T3 Features


7.3.2.1. General information
The O9400R supports a number of E3/T3 interfaces that are mapped into SDH VC-3
containers.

E3/T3 tributary module is only supporting 3 channels E3/T3 interface.

The E3/T3 interface provides a number of different services as shown below:

• E3 Transparent leased line


• T3 Transparent leased line
• T3 support M13 function

It is possible to configure the E3/T3 interfaces individually to support the different services.

E3 transparent leased line

The transparent or unstructured leased line service delivers a full digital bit rate of 34.368
Mbps with no restriction on the binary content. The service is symmetrical in both directions
and only supports point-to-point connections. An alarm indication signal (AIS) is inserted
toward the network if loss of signal (LOS) is detected from the customer. AIS is also inserted
towards the customer if LOS or other major alarms are detected from the networks.

T3 transparent leased line

The transparent or unstructured leased line service delivers a full digital bit rate of 44.736
Mbps with no restriction on the binary content. The service is symmetrical in both directions
and only supports point-to-point connection. An alarm indication signal (AIS) is inserted

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


216
User’s Manual
O9400-R

toward the network if loss of signal (LOS) is detected from the customer. AIS is also inserted
towards the customer if LOS or other major alarms are detected from the networks.

T3 support M13 function


T3 combines 28T1s or 21E1s over 44.736Mbps data stream using M13 framing format. The
device support T1 that can map to VT1.5 container, or E1 that can map to VT2 container
when M13 function is enabled.

7.3.3. Loopback
Two types of Loopback are supported for the interface; Customer Loop and Network Loop.

O9400R

XCU
E1/T1
5 4

E3/T3
SDH/
7 6 3 SONET 2 1
XC/TSA Framer

B155/622

SDH/
10 9 SONET 8
Framer

1 XCU Line Loopback


2 XCU Local Loopback
3 XCU Payload Loopback
4 E1/T1 Local Loopoback
5 E1/T1 Line Loopback
6 E3/T3 Local Loopback
7 E3/T3 Line Loopback
8 B155/622 Payload Loopback
9 B155/622 Local Loopback
10 B155/622 Line Loopback

Figure 7-14 O9400R Loopback Diagram

NOTES: XCU here means controller card.

A customer loop takes the incoming customer traffic and sends it back towards the customer.
Note that AIS is sent towards the network.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


217
User’s Manual
O9400-R

A network loop takes the incoming traffic from the network and sends it back towards the
network. Note that AIS is sent towards the customer.

The loops can be activated from the O9400R terminal or from the management system.

7.4. Management Features


This section presents the O9400R interfaces, and communication functions used for
management communications.

7.4.1. Introduction
In this context the term "management” is used to denote the network that transports
management information between a management station and the NE. The O9400R
management solution is based on SNMP over IP.

7.4.2. Management Interfaces


The management traffic pertinent to the O9400R is IP carrying SNMP, TELNET and TFTP
application protocols. In order to support management connectivity in any possible topology and
application, the O9400R supports management traffic on the following interfaces:

7.4.2.1. Management port


The Loop-O9400R has a dedicated Ethernet port for management. It can be used for
connecting to a separate external management network. The management port can be turned
off to avoid unauthorized local access. The management port cannot be a member of a VLAN.

7.4.2.2. DCC channels


The SDH architecture defines data communication channels (DCC) for transport of
management traffic in the regenerator section (DCCR - 192 kbit/s) and in the multiplexer section
(DCCM - 576 kbit/s).

Each SDH-module may terminate up to 3 DCCR (D1-D3) and/or 9 DCCM (D4-D12) channels,
i.e. an absolute upper limitation on the number of active DCC-channels is 12. For one SDH-port,
both DCC channels may be active simultaneously. Activation/deactivation of DCC channels is
configurable.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


218
User’s Manual
O9400-R

7.4.2.3. Device
Table 7-1 O9400R Device Alarms I
O9400R Device Alarms I
Alarm Type Default Severity Description
Alm Cut Off Informative Cut off all alarms
Power Loss/Unequip Major Power module loss/unequip
Fan Fail Major Fan failure
Fan Module Uneqp Minor Fan module unequip
RBC Uneqp Informative RBC unequip
Overheat Major System overheating
Ts Sync Loss Informative Timing source sync. loss
Logon and Logoff Informative User logon/logoff
Optical port Uneqp Critical Optical port SFP unequip
Card In Major Plug-in cards or standby controller card
plug-in
Card Out Major Plug-in cards or Controller Card remove
Card Type Mismatch Major Plug-in cards type not matching registered
model type for that slot*
Card Port Number Major Port number of plug-in cards not matching
Mismatch
registered port number**
Card Fail Major Plug-in cards initialization failure
Card Registration Major Plug-in cards registration
* Example: If you register an E1 card but plug in a B155/622, the card type mismatch alarm will
show.
** Example: If you register a 63 port E1 card but plug in a 32 port E1 card, the port number
mismatch alarm will show.
Table 7-2 O9400R Device Alarms II
O9400R Device Alarms II
Alarm Type Default Severity Description
SNCP/UPSR Major SNCP/UPSR protection switch
Switch
MSP Switch Informative MSP protection switch
Trib Protection Major Tributary card protection sync
SYNC
Standby Controller Major standby controller card takeover
Card Takeover
Standby Trib Informative standby trib takeover
Takeover
Controller Card Informative two controller card sync
SYNC
SFP Tx Fail Informative SFP module transmit failure
SFP Rx Fail Informative SFP module receive failure
SFP Temperature Informative SFP module overheating

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


219
User’s Manual
O9400-R

7.4.2.4. SDH/SONET Alarm


Table 7-3 SDH/SONET Alarms
SDH/SONET Alarms
Alarm Id Default Description
LOS Critical Loss Of Signal
LOF Critical Loss Of Frame
RS-TIM Minor Trace Identifier Mismatch
B1 UAS Minor Unavailable Seconds triggered by B1-BIP
MS-SF/SF-L Minor Signal Failure
MS-SD/SD-L Minor Signal Degrade
MS-AIS/AIS-L Major Alarm Indication Signal
MS-RDI/RDI-L Minor Remote Defect Indication
B2 UAS Minor Unavailable Seconds triggered by B2-BIP
MS-REI UAS/REI-L Minor Unavailable Seconds triggered by MS-REI
UAS
AU-AIS/AIS-P Major Alarm Indication Signal
AU-LOP/LOP-P Major Loss Of Pointer
HP-SF/SF-P Minor Signal Failure
HP-SD/SD-P Minor Signal Degrade
HP-TIM/TIM-P Minor Trace Identifier Mismatch
HP-RDI-S/RSI-S-P Minor Remote Server Defect Indication
HP-RDI-C/RDI-C-P Minor Remote Connectivity Defect Indication
HP-RDI-P/RDI-P-P Minor Remote Payload Defect Indication
LOM Major Loss of Multiframe
HP-UNEQ/UNEQ-P Minor Unequipped
HP-PLM/PLM-P Minor Payload Label Mismatch
HP-B3-BIP UAS/B3- Minor Unavailable Seconds triggered by B3-BIP
BIP-P UAS
HP-REI-BIP UAS/REI- Minor Unavailable Seconds triggered by HP-REI
P UAS
TU-AIS/AIS-V Major Alarm Indication Signal
TU-LOP/LOP-V Major Loss Of Pointer
LP-SF/SF-V Minor Signal Failure
LP-SD/SD-V Minor Signal Degrade
LP-TIM/TIM-V Minor Trace Identifier Mismatch
LP-RDI-S/RDI-S-V Minor Remote Server Defect Indication
LP-RDI-C/RDI-C-V Minor Remote Connectivity Defect Indication
LP-RDI-P/RDI-P-V Minor Remote Payload Defect Indication
LP-UNEQ/UNEQ-V Minor Unequipped
LP-PLM/PLM-V Minor Payload Label Mismatch
LP-V5-BIP UAS/V5- Minor Unavailable Seconds triggered by V5-BIP
BIP-V UAS
LP-V5-REI-BIP Minor Unavailable Seconds triggered by LP-V5-REI
UAS/V5-REI-V-UAS

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


220
User’s Manual
O9400-R

7.4.2.5. Unit Card


Table 7-4 Miscellaneous Alarms
Miscellaneous Alarms
Alarm Id Default Severity Description
E1 Port
TU-AIS Major Alarm Indication Signal
TU-LOP Major Loss Of Pointer
LP-SF Major Signal Failure
LP-SD Major Signal Degrade
LP-TIM Major Trace Identifier Mismatch
LP-RDI-S Major Remote Server Defect Indication
LP-RDI-C Major Remote Connectivity Defect Indication
LP-RDI-P Major Remote Payload Defect Indication
LP-UNEQ Major Unequipped
LP-PLM Major Payload Mismatch
LP-V5-BIP UAS Major Unavailable Seconds triggered by V5-BIP
LP-V5-REI UAS Major Unavailable Seconds triggered by LP-REI-
LOS Major BIP
Loss Of Signal
AIS Major Alarm Indication Signal
UAS Major Unavailable Second
RAI Major Remote Alarm Indication

Parameters associated with an alarm entry as stored in the alarm log on the network element,
are detailed in Table 7-5, below.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


221
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Table 7-5 Alarm Parameters


Alarm Parameters
Parameters Descriptions
Alarm Des String A string object to give a text description of alarm trap. The alarm description
string of free style. But it’s strongly recommended to use the same order of
the format above.
Alarm Time Stamp A string object to describe the time & date of the alarm. The time stamp format
shall be of “ hh:mm:ss MM/DD/YYYY”.
Alarm Unit An integer object to describe Unit number.
e.g. Unit-1(1), Unit-2(2)…
Alarm Card Type An integer object to describe card/module types
e.g. E1(1), E3(2), T1(3).
Alarm Port Num An integer object to describe Port Number
e.g. port-1(1), port-2(2),....
Alarm Type An integer object to describe alarm types. The alarm type shall be as generic
as possible to gain maximum reuse by all types of interface. For example, the
alarm type for E1-LOS shall defined as LOS
e.g. LOS(1), LOF(2), Card_OUT, Card_IN, .....
Alarm Severity An integer object to describe alarm severity. (e.g. critical, major, minor,
informative …).
Alarm Status An integer object to describe alarm Status (e.g. active, cleared, ABS (Active
but suppressed))

Alarm severity:
It is possible for the operator to assign an alarm severity for each combination of Object Type +
Alarm Id. The severity levels are INFORM, MINOR, MAJOR and CRITICAL. Default values are
assigned automatically.

Alarm presentation:
It is possible to view a list of all current alarms and a log of alarm events. The size of the log of
alarm events is 5000. The graphical representation of managed objects reflects the alarm state
(severity level) by use of an appropriate colour.

Alarm filtering:
Alarms are suppressed if the object subject to alarm is disabled (by setting its administrative state
down). Alarm disabling applies to device, module and port objects. Disabling an object also applies
to its subordinate objects.

For the SDH objects AU-4, VC-4, TU-3, VC-3, TU-11/12 and VC-11/12, the administrator is able
to configure an alarm mask for each object type. This alarm mask applies as a general filter to all
SDH objects of the corresponding type.

For E1 and E3 ports, the administrator is able to configure an alarm mask for each port
instance.

Alarm suppression:
If an alarm is active, it may also suppress other (lower-order) alarms. How active alarms may
suppress other (lower-order) alarms, are defined by the tables below.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


222
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Table 7-6 Alarm Suppression Table for SDH Related Items

NOTES: Alarm suppression (as stated in Table 7-6, below) is only performed for
alarms confined to one side of the DXC. Alarm suppression is not provided
across the DXC.

Object Type (class)


SPI RS MS Au-4 VC-4 TU-3 VC-3 PDH Suppression of other
TU- VC- (RX) alarms?
11/12 11/12
LOS x Yes, all with higher
LOF x Yes, all with higher numbers
TIM x No
AIS x Yes, all with higher numbers
RDI x No
LOP x Yes, all with higher numbers
AIS x Yes, all with higher numbers
UNEQ x Yes, all with higher numbers
TIM x No
RDI x No
PLM x No
AIS x Yes, all with higher numbers
LOM x Yes, all with higher numbers
LOP x Yes, all with higher numbers
AIS x Yes, all with higher numbers
UNEQ x Yes, all with higher numbers
TIM x No
RDI x No
PLM x No

Table 7-7 Alarm Suppression Table for PDH (tributary) Alarms


Alarm Suppression Table for PDH (tributary) Alarms
Alarm ID Suppress alarms with higher numbers
LOS Yes
AIS Yes
UAS Yes
RAI Yes

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


223
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Line LOS

Line LOF

Line SF Line SD RS-TIM MS-AIS B1-UAS B2-UAS

AU-LOP

AU-AIS

HP-SF HP-SD HP-PLM HP-UNEQ HP-LOM HP-TIM HP-AIS B3-UAS

TU-LOP

TU-AIS

LP-SF LP-SD LP-PLM LP-UNEQ LP-TIM LP-AIS V5-UAS

Table 7-8 Alarm Suppression Sequence

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


224
User’s Manual
O9400-R

7.5. Configuration Management


7.5.1. Backup and Restoration of Configuration Data
It is possible to back-up the configuration data of an O9400R device. It is also possible to reload
the configuration from the backup. The back-up media is in a central repository.

7.5.2. Software download


It is possible to download new software and FPGA code to the O9400R device itself and to
modules/external modules. For all software and FPGA code items there are capacity of
storing two different versions in the device, and switchover from one version to the other one
is possible by operator command.

7.5.3. Feature management


The embedded software in the O9400R is capable of supporting all features (licensed or not
licensed) finalized at the time of the release. To activate a specific feature, the device checks
whether it has the corresponding licensed right to do it. Licenses can be ordered individually
for each available functionality (OSI, HW Routing). This will be a unique file for each NE,
generated based on a software key bound to the serial number of each O9400R device, and
they are stored internally in each O9400R.

7.5.4. Device reset


It is possible to reset (reboot) the device with or without resetting the current configuration.
Reboot has minimal impact on traffic processing.

The period of time from the moment you have triggered a restart to the time that the device
is up and running is dependent on equipped modules and SW configuration of the device.

7.5.5. Module Management


The O9400R module's configurations are maintained in the O9400R. If a module is restarted or
replaced with a new one of the same type, it is initialized with the right configuration
automatically. If a module is replaced with a new one of another type, an alarm is raised. If a
module is removed or communication with the module is lost, an alarm is raised.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


225
User’s Manual
O9400-R

8. O9400R TOPOLOGY
PROTECTION TYPES
The purpose of this section is to clarify for our customers the types of protection available with
the O9400R.

There are two main types of data path protection that can be used with the O9400R. One is
MSP (Multiplexer Section Protection) 1+1. Basically, in this type of protection an entire span
(including all timeslots traveling on that span) is protected. For SDH that span is defined as a
Multiplexer Section. For SONET it is defined as a line. The second type of protection is known
as SNCP/UPSR. Basically, in SNCP/UPSR protection, an individual tributary (dual-fed into
different paths on the transmit side) can be protected by path selectors at the path termination
points on the receive side.

In the sections below this paper will discuss signal transmission path and protection schemes in
different topologies (ie. Network Element layouts) for the O9400R. It will also discuss the
relative merits of transmitting signals without protection, with MSP 1+1 protection, with
SNCP/UPSR protection and with a combination of SNCP/UPSR and MSP protection.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


226
User’s Manual
O9400-R

8.1. Configuration 1: Linear Topology


without Protection

Linear Topology Without Protection


Span of : Multiplexer Sections (SDH) or Lines (SONET)

Terminal Add/Drop Add/Drop Add/Drop Terminal


Multiplexer Multiplexer Multiplexer Multiplexer Multiplexer

E1/T1 E1/T1 E1/T1 E1/T1 E1/T1


E3/T3 E3/T3 E3/T3 E3/T3 E3/T3
Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet
STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1

Figure 8-1 Linear Topology without Protection

Application:
This configuration is very practical when there is a linear geographic limit to the client’s NE
(Network Element) layout, and fiber availability is limited.

Add/Drop Capacity:
TM = The limit is determined by the STM-1/4 capacity.
ADM =The limit is determined by the E1 cards add/drop capacity.

Advantages:
A simple, 2 fiber layout

Disadvantages:
No protection against fiber cut and circuit pack failure

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


227
User’s Manual
O9400-R

8.2. Configuration 2: Linear Topology


with MSP (1+1) Protection

Linear Topology With MSP 1+1 Protection

Working Working Working Working


Section/ Line Section/ Line Section/ Line Section/ Line

TM ADM ADM ADM TM

Protection Protection Protection Protection


Section/ Line Section/ Line Section/ Line Section/ Line

E1/T1 E1/T1 E1/T1 E1/T1 E1/T1


E3/T3 E3/T3 E3/T3 E3/T3 E3/T3
Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet
STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1

MSP 1+1 Protection Scheme

Working Line
2:1
Protection Line select

A Working Line
B
2:1
select Protection Line

Figure 8-2 Linear Topology with MSP (1+1) Protection


Operation:
In the AB direction, the whole outgoing payload is dual-fed into both the working section/line
and the protection section/line at node A. The payloads from both sections are received at
node B. Based on the integrity and algorithm provided by the Multiplex Section embedded
inside the transport frame, only one of the payloads will be selected and used at node B. This
is how MSP 1+1 works. Note that the paths or sub-channels within the Multiplexing Section are
treated as a whole pipe, in terms of the MSP 1+1 protection. The whole payload selected is
either from the working section/line or from the protection section/line.

Application:
This configuration is ideal in a linear topology with spare fiber available. The client can benefit
both protection against fiber cut and protection against circuit pack failure.

Add/Drop Capacity:
TM = The limit is determined by the STM-1/4 capacity.
ADM =The limit is determined by the E1 cards add/drop capacity.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


228
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Advantages:
All tributary traffic is protected against fiber cut and circuit pack failure

Disadvantages:
Four fibers are required. Maximum 63 E1’s capacity at head ends (TMs)

NOTES: To achieve the best possible protection, the working fibers should take
different routes in different fiber bundles

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


229
User’s Manual
O9400-R

8.3. Configuration 3: Ring Topology with


SNCP/UPSR Protection
STM-1/4 SNCP
Protection Architecture

E1 or T1 E1 orT1
E1: 2,048 kbit/s
Output Input
T1: 1.544 kbit/s
B A A B STM-1: 155,520 kbit/s
Node STM-4: 622.080 kbit/s
A

Working

STM-1/4 Protection

Protection
STM-1/4

Working

Node B
B A A B

E1 or T1 E1 or T1
Input Output

Figure 8-3-a Ring Topology with SNCP/UPSR Protection (Normal)

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


230
User’s Manual
O9400-R

E1 or T1 E1 orT1
Output Input

B A A B
Node
A

Working

STM-1/4 Protection

Protection
STM-1/4

Working

Node B
B A A B

E1 or T1 E1 or T1
Input Output

Figure 8-4-b Ring Topology with SNCP/UPSR Protection (Failed Condition)


Operation:
In the BA direction, at Node B the tributary traffic is fed into both the working path and the
protected path. Both of these paths are received at Node A. Only one of them will be selected
and fed to the output of the tributary. If one of the traffic paths fails to make it to Node A
because of fiber cuts or other problems, the path selector inside of Node A will switch to the
active path. Each tributary in the node has a path selector associated with it. The path
selectors are independent of each other.

Application:
This configuration is useful to clients wanting full path protection in a ring topology.

Add/Drop Capacity:
The limit determined by the bandwidth of the STM-1/4 aggregate line.

Advantages:
Two fibers only; well protected against fiber cut

Disadvantages:
Ring topology is a must.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


231
User’s Manual
O9400-R

8.4. Configuration 4: Ring Topology


without SNCP/UPSR Protection

STM-1/4 Ring without


SNCP Protection

POTS
SW1

63 E1 63 E1

O940
O-9100
O9400R
0
EAST WEST

POTS O940 O940 POTS


SW2
O-9100
O9400R
0 STM-1/4 Ring without SNCP Protection O-9100
O9400R
0 SW3

WEST EAST
O940
O-9100
O9400R
0

63 E1
63 E1

POTS
SW4

Figure 8-5 Ring Topology without SNCP/UPSR Protection

This application assumes a case where there is a traffic flow of more than 252 E1’s between
POTS Switch- 1 and POTS switch-4. The E1 tributary adding to or dropping from the O9400R
can be set up in a way that no SNCP/UPSR protection is configured. Theoretically, the
maximum capacity between POTS SW1 and POTS SW4 is 504 E1’s without SNCP/UPSR
dual-feed protection in a ring topology like this. 252 E1’s travel through the EAST side, while
the other 252 E1’s travel through the WEST side. When there is a fiber cut anywhere in the
ring, half of the traffic between SW1 and SW4 will be gone, while leaving the other half of it
unaffected. This approach will provide another form of protection, implicit protection, if the
switches or end equipments can still work with half of the traffic is gone.

This implicit protection scheme can be achieved through careful network planning. The traffic
between any two nodes could be separated into two groups. Each of them is deliberately
directed to a different route to achieve the implicit protection goal. This configuration is good in
terms of both maximum capacity and implicit protection. Owing to the limit of 6 E1 cards
available on the O9400R, the maximum number of E1s added to or dropped from a node is 378
(6 x 63), instead of 504.

Application:
This configuration would be useful to clients who are prepared to achieve a maximum capacity
of 378 E1’s in a ring topology.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


232
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Add/Drop Capacity:
378 E1’s without protection (Theoretically, the A/D capacity is 504 E1’s. Due to the limitation of
the numbers, 6, of E1 cards, the maximum capacity will be 6 x 63 = 378);

Advantages:
Two fibers only.

Disadvantages:
Ring topology is a must. Half of the traffic will be affected if a fiber is cut.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


233
User’s Manual
O9400-R

8.5. Configuration 5: Ring Topology with


and without SNCP/UPSR Protection
Operation:
It is possible to set up an O9400R network that combines Configuration 3 and Configuration 4
in a ring topology where the client can determine what to protect and what not to protect. The
advantage of this system is that vital traffic flow can be protected (at a cost of otherwise
available E1s) but other paths or lines can be left unprotected and thus fully utilized to carry
non-vital traffic. This way, the client protects what needs to be protected, and gains back some
capacity in the unprotected areas. It is a flexible network well suited to the needs of some
clients.

Application:
This configuration would be useful to clients who needs more than 252 E1’s throughput. While
still staying with this STM-4 ring, they are prepared to have mixed traffic types, some with
explicit SNCP/UPSR protection and some without.

Add/Drop Capacity:
The limit is determined by the number of E1 cards.

Advantages:
Two fibers only adding/dropping more than 252 E1’s per node;

Disadvantages:
Ring topology is a must. Half of the traffic without protection will be affected when a fiber is cut.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


234
User’s Manual
O9400-R

8.6. Configuration 6: Ring Topology with


both SNCP/UPSR & MSP Protection
E1/T1
E3/T3
Ethernet
STM-1

O9400R ADM O9400R ADM


E1/T1 O9400R ADM E1/T1
E3/T3 E3/T3
Ethernet Ethernet
STM-1 STM-1
Loop SDH STM-4 Ring with
Double Protection
[ SNCP/ UPSR & MSP(1+1)]
E1/T1 E1/T1
E3/T3 E3/T3
Ethernet Ethernet
STM-1 STM-1
O9400R ADM
O9400R ADM O9400R ADM

E1/T1
E3/T3
Ethernet
STM-1

Figure 8-6 Ring Topology with both SNCP/UPSR & MSP Protection

Application:
This configuration would be useful to clients who need thorough protection against fiber cut and
optical circuit pack failure.

Add/Drop Capacity:
The limit is determined by the bandwidth of the STM-1/4 aggregate line.

Advantages:
Double protection is provided by SNCP/UPSR and MSP;

Disadvantages:
Ring topology is a must. Eight fibers are necessary.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


235
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Maximum Tolerance of Fiber-Cut in Ring Topology with both SNCP/UPSR & MSP
Protection

Double Protection with


SNCP & MSP

E1/T1
E3/T3
Ethernet

1 O9400R
0 1
0

Sp
an

E1/T1 E1/T1
E3/T3 1 O9400R
0 1
0 O9400R
0 1
1 0 E3/T3
Ethernet Ethernet
Loop SDH STM-1/4 Ring with
Double Protection (SNCP & MSP)

E1/T1 E1/T1
E3/T3 1 O9400R
0 1
0 O9400R
0 1
0 E3/T3
1
Ethernet Ethernet
Sp
an

O9400R
0 1
1 0

One Double fault


allowed within the E1/T1
same span
E3/T3
Ethernet

Figure 8-7 Maximum Tolerance of Fiber-Cut in Ring Topology with both SNCP/UPSR & MSP
Protection

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


236
User’s Manual
O9400-R

8.7. Configuration 7: Ring Topology with


MSP Protection
Ring with MSP Protection
E1/T1
E3/T3
Ethernet

0 O9400R
1 0
1

E1/T1 E1/T1
E3/T3 1O9400R
0 1
0 O9400R
0 1
1 0 E3/T3
Ethernet Ethernet

Loop SDH STM-1/4 Ring with


MSP protection

E1/T1 E1/T1
E3/T3 1O9400R
0 1
0 O9400R
0 1
0
E3/T3
1
Ethernet Ethernet

O9400R
0 1
1 0

E1/T1
E3/T3
Ethernet

Figure 8-8 Ring Topology with MSP Protection

Application:
This configuration would be useful to clients who need 378 E1’s add/drop capacity and still
enjoy MSP protection.

Add/Drop Capacity:
378 E1’s without protection (Theoretically, the A/D capacity is 504 E1’s. Due to the limitation of
the numbers, 6, of E1 cards, the maximum capacity will be 6 x 63 = 378)

Advantages:
Maximum bandwidth (378 E1’s) and MSP protection at the same time.

Disadvantages:
Ring topology is a must.
4 fibers are necessary.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


237
User’s Manual
O9400-R

Maximum Tolerance of Fiber-Cut in Configuration 7

Ring with MSP


protection
E1/T1
E3/T3
Ethernet

1 O9400R
0
0 1

Sp
an

E1/T1 E1/T1
E3/T3 1O9400R
0
0 1 O9400R
0 1
1 0 E3/T3
Ethernet Ethernet

Loop SDH STM-1/4 Ring with


MSP protection

E1/T1 E1/T1
E3/T3 1 O9400R
0
0 1
O9400R
1 0
0 1 E3/T3
Ethernet Ethernet
Sp
an

1O9400R
0 0
1

NO Double fault
allowed within the E1/T1
same span E3/T3
Ethernet

Figure 8-9 Maximum Tolerance of Fiber-Cut in Ring Topology with MSP Protection

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


238
User’s Manual
O9400-R

9. ALARM TRAP APPENDIX

9.1. Local Alarm Trap


Trap definition -- trap MIB

loopO9400RLocalTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE loop-O9400R
VARIABLES {alarmQueueString,
alarmQueueTimeStamp,
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueueCardModel,
alarmQueueRegModel,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueVC43STS31Type,
alarmQueueTU1xVTxType,
alarmQueueVC4STS3,
alarmQueueVC3TUG3,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
alarmQueueSeverity }
DESCRIPTION
"Local alarm trap"
::= 3

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


239
User’s Manual
O9400-R

9.2. Critical Alarm Active Trap


loopO9400RCriticalAlmActiveTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE loop-O9400R
VARIABLES {alarmQueueString,
alarmQueueTimeStamp,
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueueCardModel,
alarmQueueRegModel,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueVC43STS31Type,
alarmQueueTU1xVTxType,
alarmQueueVC4STS3,
alarmQueueVC3TUG3,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
alarmQueueSeverity }
DESCRIPTION
"Critical alarm active trap"
::= 6

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


240
User’s Manual
O9400-R

9.3. Critical Alarm Cleared Trap


loopO9400RCriticalAlmClearedTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE loop-O9400R
VARIABLES {alarmQueueString,
alarmQueueTimeStamp,
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueueCardModel,
alarmQueueRegModel,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueVC43STS31Type,
alarmQueueTU1xVTxType,
alarmQueueVC4STS3,
alarmQueueVC3TUG3,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
alarmQueueSeverity }
DESCRIPTION
"Critical alarm clear trap"
::= 7

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


241
User’s Manual
O9400-R

9.4. Major Alarm Active Trap


loopO9400RMajorAlmActiveTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE loop-O9400R
VARIABLES {alarmQueueString,
alarmQueueTimeStamp,
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueueCardModel,
alarmQueueRegModel,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueVC43STS31Type,
alarmQueueTU1xVTxType,
alarmQueueVC4STS3,
alarmQueueVC3TUG3,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
alarmQueueSeverity }
DESCRIPTION
"Major alarm active trap"
::= 8

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


242
User’s Manual
O9400-R

9.5. Major Alarm Cleared Trap


loopO9400RMajorAlmClearedTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE loop-O9400R
VARIABLES {alarmQueueString,
alarmQueueTimeStamp,
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueueCardModel,
alarmQueueRegModel,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueVC43STS31Type,
alarmQueueTU1xVTxType,
alarmQueueVC4STS3,
alarmQueueVC3TUG3,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
alarmQueueSeverity }
DESCRIPTION
"Major alarm clear trap"
::= 9

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


243
User’s Manual
O9400-R

9.6. Minor Alarm ActiveTrap


loopO9400RMinorAlmActiveTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE loop-O9400R
VARIABLES {alarmQueueString,
alarmQueueTimeStamp,
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueueCardModel,
alarmQueueRegModel,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueVC43STS31Type,
alarmQueueTU1xVTxType,
alarmQueueVC4STS3,
alarmQueueVC3TUG3,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
alarmQueueSeverity }
DESCRIPTION
"Minor alarm active trap"
::= 10

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


244
User’s Manual
O9400-R

9.7. Minor Alarm Cleared Trap


loopO9400RMinorAlmClearedTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE loop-O9400R
VARIABLES {alarmQueueString,
alarmQueueTimeStamp,
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueueCardModel,
alarmQueueRegModel,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueVC43STS31Type,
alarmQueueTU1xVTxType,
alarmQueueVC4STS3,
alarmQueueVC3TUG3,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
alarmQueueSeverity }
DESCRIPTION
"Minor alarm clear trap"
::= 11

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


245
User’s Manual
O9400-R

9.8. Info ActiveTrap


loopO9400RInfoActiveTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE loop-O9400R
VARIABLES {alarmQueueString,
alarmQueueTimeStamp,
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueueCardModel,
alarmQueueRegModel,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueVC43STS31Type,
alarmQueueTU1xVTxType,
alarmQueueVC4STS3,
alarmQueueVC3TUG3,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
alarmQueueSeverity }
DESCRIPTION
"Info active trap"
::= 12

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


246
User’s Manual
O9400-R

9.9. Info Cleared Trap


loopO9400RInfoClearedTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE loop-O9400R
VARIABLES {alarmQueueString,
alarmQueueTimeStamp,
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueueCardModel,
alarmQueueRegModel,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueVC43STS31Type,
alarmQueueTU1xVTxType,
alarmQueueVC4STS3,
alarmQueueVC3TUG3,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
alarmQueueSeverity }
DESCRIPTION
"Info clear trap"
::= 13

9.9.1. alarmQueueUnit
Table 9-1alarmQueueUnit: Unit index
Number Unit Number
1 xcu1-w
2 xcu2-e
3 unit-1
4 unit-2
5 unit-3
6 unit-4
7 unit-5
8 unit-6
9 unit-7
10 unit-8
11 pwr1
12 pwr2
13 conn

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


247
User’s Manual
O9400-R

9.9.2. alarmQueueCard Model: Card Model Type

Table 9-2 Alarm Queue Card Model: Card model type


Number Card Type Card Type Description
1 xcu Controller Card
2 e1t1 E1T1 card
4 e3t3 E3T3 card
6 b155-622 B155/622 card
7 power AC/DC power card
8 connect-card Connect card
10 enet-sw Ethernet card with switch
12 enet Ethernet card without
switch
13 e1-75ohm E1-75ohm card
20 unknown unknow

9.9.3. alarmQueueRegModel: Reg. model type

Table 9-3 alarmQueueRegModel: Reg. model type


Number Reg. Model Type
1 xcu
2 e1
3 t1
4 e3
5 t3
6 stm4
7 stm1
8 oc12
9 oc3
10 enet-sw
11 enet

9.9.4. alarmQueuePortNum: Port index

Table 9-4 alarmQueuePortNum: Port index


Number Port Number
1 to 64 Port 1 to Port 64
100 not-available

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


248
User’s Manual
O9400-R

9.9.5. alarmQueueVcChan: VC channel

Table 9-5 alarmQueueVcChan: VC channel


Number VC channel Number
1 to 64 VC 1 to VC 64

9.9.6. alarmQueueAlmNum 0 to 30: System alarm

Table 9-6 alarmQueueAlmNum 0 to 30: System alarm


Number Alarm type
0 unknown
1 sys-alm-cut-off
2 sys-alm-power-unqp-loss
3 sys-alm-fan-fail
4 sys-alm-fan-module-
uneqp
5 sys-alm-rbc-uneqp
6 sys-alm-overheat
7 sys-alm-ts-sync-loss
8 sys-alm-log-on-off
9 sys-alm-xcu-port-uneqp
10 sys-alm-card-in
11 sys-alm-card-out
12 sys-alm-card-mismatch
13 sys-alm-port-mismatch
14 sys-alm-card-fail
15 sys-alm-card-registration
16 sys-alm-SNCP/UPSR-
switch
17 sys-alm-msp-switch
18 sys-alm-trib-protection
19 sys-alm-xcu-takeover
20 sys-alm-trib-takeover
21 sys-alm-xcu-sync
22 sys-alm-sfp-tx-fail
23 sys-alm-sfp-rx-fail
24 sys-alm-sfp-temperatue
25 sys-alm-msp-sprring
26 sys-alm-cort-tx-err
27 external-alarm-1
28 external-alarm-2
29 external-alarm-3
30 external-alarm-4

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


249
User’s Manual
O9400-R

9.9.7. alarmQueueAlmNum 36 to 126: SHD alarm


Table 9-7 alarmQueueAlmNum 36 to 126: SDH alarm
36 PI-LOS
37 RS-LOF
38 RS-TIM
39 MS-SD
40 MS-SF
41 MS-AIS
42 MS-RDI
43 MS-REI
44 MS-B1-BIP
45 MS-B2-BIP
46 MS-REI-TCA
47 RS-B1-BIP-TCA
48 MS-B2-BIP-TCA
71 AU-LOP
72 AU-AIS
73 HP-SD
74 HP-SF
75 HP-UNEQ
76 HP-PLM
77 HP-TIM
78 HP-RDI-P
79 HP-RDI-S
80 HP-RDI-C
82 HP-LOM
83 HP-REI
84 HP-B3-BIP
87 HP-REI-TCA
88 HP-B3-BIP-TCA
106 TU-LOP
107 TU-AIS
108 LP-SD
109 LP-SF
110 IP-UNEQ
111 LP-PLM
112 LP-TIM
113 LP-RDI-P
114 LP-RDI-S
115 LP-RDI-C
117 LP-REI-B3
118 LP-REI-V5
119 LP-B3-BIP
120 LP-V5-BIP
123 LP-REI-B3-TCA
124 LP-REI-V5-TCA
125 LP-B3-BIP-TCA
126 LP-V5-BIP-TCA

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


250
User’s Manual
O9400-R

9.9.8. alarmQueueAlmNum 136 to 226: SONET alarm

Table 9-8 alarmQueueAlmNum 136 to 226: SONET alarm


Number Alarm type
136 LOS-PI
137 LOF-S
138 none1
139 SD-L
140 SF-L
141 AIS-L
142 RDI-L
143 REI-L
144 B1-BIP-S
145 B2-BIP-L
146 REI-L-TCA
147 B1-BIP-S-TCA
148 B2-BIP-L-TCA
171 LOP-P
172 AIS-P
173 SD-P
174 SF-P
175 UNEQ-P
176 PLM-P
177 TIM-P
178 RDI-P-P
179 RDI-S-P
180 RDI-C-P
182 LOM-P
183 REI-P
184 B3-BIP-P
187 REI-P-TCA
188 B3-BIP-P-TCA
206 LOP-V
207 AIS-V
208 SD-V
209 SF-V
210 UNEQ-V
211 PLM-V
212 TIM-V
213 RDI-P-V
214 RDI-S-V
215 RDI-C-V
217 B3-REI-V
218 V5-REI-V
219 B3-BIP-V
220 V5-BIP-V

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


251
User’s Manual
O9400-R

223 B3-REI-V-TCA
224 V5-REI-V-TCA
225 B3-BIP-V-TCA
226 V5-BIP-V-TCA

9.9.9. alarmQueueAlmNum 300 to 303: E1T1 alarm

Table 9-9 alarmQueueAlmNum 300 to 303: E1T1 alarm


Number Alarm type
300 E1T1-LINE-LOS
301 E1T1-LINE-AIS
302 E1T1-LINE-UAS
303 E1T1-LINE-RAI-YEL

9.9.10. alarmQueueAlmNum 500 to 600: E3T3 alarm

Table 9-10 alarmQueueAlmNum 500 to 600: E3T3 alarm


Number Alarm type
500 E3T3-LINE-LOS
501 E3T3-LINE-AIS
502 E3T3-LINE-UAS
503 E3T3-LINE-RAI-YEL
504 E3T3-LINE-LOF
505 E3T3-LINE-IDLE
506 E3T3-LINE-P-C-BITS
556 E3T3-LINE-FAS
600 E3T3-M13-AIS

9.9.11. alarmQueueVC43STS31Type: AU4 /AU3 type in


SDH, STS-3c or STS-1 type in SONET

Table 9-11 alarmQueueVC43STS31Type: AU4 /AU3 type in SDH, STS-3c or STS-1 type in SONET
Number AU4 /AU3 type in SDH,
STS-3c or STS-1 type in
SONET
1 no-ho-map
2 vc4
3 au3-sts1c
4 au4-sts3c
100 not-available

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


252
User’s Manual
O9400-R

9.9.12. alarmQueueTU1xVTxType: Tu1x type

Table 9-12 alarmQueueTU1xVTxType: Tu1x type


Number Tu1x type
1 no-lo-map
2 tu3
3 c3
4 tu11-vt15
5 tu12-vt2
6 bypass
100 not-available

9.9.13. alarmQueueVC4STS3: The number of STM1

Table 9-13 alarmQueueVC4STS3: The number of STM1


Number STM1 index
1 aug1-sts3-1
2 aug1-sts3-2
3 aug1-sts3-3
4 aug1-sts3-4
100 not-available

9.9.14. alarmQueueVC3TUG3: The number of Tug3

Table 9-14 alarmQueueVC3TUG3: The number of Tug3


Number Tug3 index
1 Tug3-1
2 Tug3-2
3 Tug3-3

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


253
User’s Manual
O9400-R

9.9.15. alarmQueueTUG2VTG: The number of Tug2

Table 9-15 alarmQueueTUG2VTG: The number of Tug2


Number Tug2 index
1 Tug2-1
2 Tug2-2
3 Tug2-3
4 Tug2-4
5 Tug2-5
6 Tug2-6
7 Tug2-7

9.9.16. alarmQueueTU1xVTx: The number of Tu1x

Table 9-16 alarmQueueTU1xVTx: The number of Tu1x


Number Tu1x index
1 Tu1x-1
2 Tu1x-2
3 Tu1x-3
4 Tu1x-4

9.9.17. alarmQueueStatus: Alarm status

Table 9-17 alarmQueueStatus: Alarm status


Number Alarm status
1 cleared
2 active
3 abs
4 disable
100 not-available

9.9.18. alarmQueueSeverity: Alarm severity

Table 9-18 alarmQueueSeverity: Alarm severity


Number Alarm severity
1 critical
2 major
3 minor
4 information
100 not-available

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


254
User’s Manual
O9400-R

10. ACTIVATE INET-LCT


10.1. Activate iNET-LCT
To activate iNET-LCT, there are three steps:

1. Inform Loop for your hardware info.


2. You will receive license file from Loop.
3. Activate the license.

1. Inform Loop for your hardware info.

O > Log on
S > System Setup
N > Command Line
Key in hwinfo disp CARD then press ENTER, the system will show the info you need. Copy and
paste the info shown and send to Loop representatives.

Table 10-1 Hardware Info Display Commands


Commands Description
hwinfo disp <CARD> Display <CARD> hardware info.
working WORKING (CONTROLLER)
standby STANDBY (CONTROLLER)

NOTES: The argument in < > should be substituted by the user.

A sample screen is as below:


09:1 1:2 7 J ul 1 7/1 7 > >hwi nfo di sp w ork ing
Disp lay sl ot W ORK ING (XC U) HW info (i n J SON for mat )
Plea se cop y be low in fo a nd pas te o n t ext fil e:
{
"p id" : 9 416,
"c id" : 1 ,
"w Exp ": "",
"h wli st" : [
{
" hws n": "95 3",
" hwv er": "D , F PGA: V1 "
}
]
}

Abov e d ata for HW in fo e xpo rt.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


255
User’s Manual
O9400-R

09:1 1:4 3 J ul 1 7/1 7 > >hwi nfo di sp s tan dby


Disp lay sl ot S TAN DBY (XC U) HW info (i n J SON for mat )
Plea se cop y be low in fo a nd pas te o n t ext fil e:
{
"p id" : 9 416,
"c id" : 1 ,
"w Exp ": "",
"h wli st" : [
{
" hws n": "95 4",
" hwv er": "D , F PGA: V1 "
}
]
}

Abov e d ata for HW in fo e xpo rt.

Or you can: Key in hwinfo upload CARD then press ENTER. To upload hardware info via TFTP.

Table 10-2 Hardware Info Upload Commands


Commands Description
hwinfo upload <CARD> Upload <CARD> hardware info.
working WORKING (CONTROLLER)
standby STANDBY (CONTROLLER)

A sample screen is as below:


18:0 5:1 5 J ul 1 7/1 7 > >hwi nfo up load st and by

O940 0R - XCU 16-C HAA == = Up loa d H W In fo === 1 8:05 :26 07 /17/ 201 7
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, BA CKS PACE to ed it, ESC to abo rt

Uplo ad slo t ST AND BY (XCU ) H W i nfo (in JS ON f orm at)

TFTP Se rve r IP : 1 92. 168 .11. 91


Uplo ad Fil e Na me : H WIN FO- 0009 54. urg

18: 05: 41 0 7/1 7/1 7 U plo adi ng f ile .. . 13 5 b yte s tr ans mit ted.

2. You will receive license file from Loop.

After Loop receives your requirement as well as hardware info correctly, you will soon receive
license file from Loop.

3. Activate the license.

Follow below steps to activate the function you purchase.

O > Log on
S > System Setup
N > Command Line
Key in falicense import then press ENTER, the system will ask you to copy from license file and
paste.

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


256
User’s Manual
O9400-R

A successful activation screen example is as below:


16:0 5:4 3 J ul 1 7/1 7 > >fal ice nse imp ort
Plea se cop y fr om lic ense fi le and pas te belo w: (EN TER acc ept , ES C b rea k)
CW2Z CTL DVC 6HH4 CMG 7NJ 2HVV WO2 VRG 57PV JRA PVR H7CG XCW B5N X2VD 7WF PPJ ZBVK 6LQ NAE SMQZ 2B6 FNJ
B3S6 GQ7 QVZ SR6O QGE DIT BW63 FQC DJA 5QX2 2BV E7F EJWC 6I5 KNG S6RW L2F RF5 LZI4 6WZ I7Z BF5Z PWA XDV
AEZW RVS 3QI RQ42 SR5 QMW ADTI LIB 4U3 5ASN I2O HSN EE75 TW6 AEQ DD2D D6O O7I 7T7R YDC DOW GNVZ 4NJ 4WT
3O7N LR2 OIF KNF3 SSG JYV T53E 3U4 QM7 X7I4 JSQ ASK 3ZSM CRF 2KI HW7A 7FS VDU MCCP 5MZ Q

Stan dby XC U: A cti vat e iN ET - LCT .

NOTES: See Controller Menu > (C) System Config Display > (K) Activation Status for more
info.

O940 0R - CC4 -CHA = == Act ivat ion St atus == = 1 0:5 8:03 09 /01 /201 7
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

Slot : X CU

Item Wor king S tan dby


==== === === === ==== === = = === === ====
Warr ant y
iNET -LC T Act ivat ed D eac tiv ated

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


257
User’s Manual
O9400-R

11. GLOSSARY
ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
APS Automatic Protection Switching
APSD Automatic Power Shut Down
AU Administrative Unit
BER Bit Error Rate
BIP Bit Interleaved Parity
DCC Data Communication Channel
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
ES Errored Second
ESR Errored Second Ratio
HP HO (higher order) path
LOF Loss of Frame
LOM Loss of Multiframe
LOS Loss of Signal
LP LO (lower order) Path
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
OOF Out of Frame
PLM Payload Label Mismatch
PLL Phase Lock Loop
P.P.A.D Path-protected ADD & DROP
RS Regenerator Section
SES Severely Errored Second
SESR Severely Errored Second Ratio
SNCP/UPS Sub Network Connection Protection
R
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol
SSM Synchronization Status Message
STS Synchronous transport signal
TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch
TM Terminal Multiplexer
TP Termination Point
TSA Time Slot Assignment
UAS Unavailable Second

Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.


258

You might also like